Mercurial > emacs
comparison etc/NEWS @ 71203:25fa0038a52d
Reorganize NEWS and ONEWS.* files into NEWS for current major version
and NEWS.21, NEWS.20, NEWS.19, NEWS.18, and NEWS.1-17 for older version.
Update copyright notices.
author | Kim F. Storm <storm@cua.dk> |
---|---|
date | Sun, 04 Jun 2006 01:01:51 +0000 |
parents | cc77c3208f2c |
children | db157113b47c |
comparison
equal
deleted
inserted
replaced
71202:86cedfd9ade6 | 71203:25fa0038a52d |
---|---|
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2006-05-21 | 1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2006-06-04 |
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 | 2 Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 |
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
4 See the end for copying conditions. | 4 See the end for copying conditions. |
5 | 5 |
6 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | 6 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. |
7 For older news, see the file ONEWS | 7 If possible, use M-x report-emacs-bug. |
8 You can narrow news to the specific version by calling | 8 |
9 `view-emacs-news' with a prefix argument or by typing C-u C-h C-n. | 9 This file is about changes in emacs version 22. |
10 | |
11 See files NEWS.21, NEWS.20, NEWS.19, NEWS.18, and NEWS.1-17 for changes | |
12 in older emacs versions. | |
13 | |
14 You can narrow news to a specific version by calling `view-emacs-news' | |
15 with a prefix argument or by typing C-u C-h C-n. | |
10 | 16 |
11 Temporary note: | 17 Temporary note: |
12 +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated. | 18 +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated. |
13 --- means no change in the manuals is called for. | 19 --- means no change in the manuals is called for. |
14 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | 20 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- |
5654 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a | 5660 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a |
5655 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does | 5661 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does |
5656 return. The macro `1value' suppresses a brown splotch for its argument. | 5662 return. The macro `1value' suppresses a brown splotch for its argument. |
5657 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals | 5663 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals |
5658 an error if the argument actually returns differing values. | 5664 an error if the argument actually returns differing values. |
5665 | |
5666 | |
5659 | 5667 |
5660 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3 | |
5661 | |
5662 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has | |
5663 been added. | |
5664 | |
5665 | |
5666 * Changes in Emacs 21.3 | |
5667 | |
5668 ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems | |
5669 with Custom. | |
5670 | |
5671 ** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters | |
5672 as mule-utf-8. | |
5673 | |
5674 ** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically | |
5675 in UTF-8 locales). | |
5676 | |
5677 ** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in | |
5678 different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the | |
5679 Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' | |
5680 and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation | |
5681 between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding | |
5682 (e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that | |
5683 `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but | |
5684 `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read | |
5685 it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable. | |
5686 By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on. | |
5687 | |
5688 ** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of | |
5689 `selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'. | |
5690 | |
5691 If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to | |
5692 compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using | |
5693 compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding | |
5694 text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behavior is actually | |
5695 contrary to the compound text specification. | |
5696 | |
5697 | |
5698 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.2 | |
5699 | |
5700 ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added. | |
5701 | |
5702 ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added. | |
5703 | |
5704 | |
5705 * Changes in Emacs 21.2 | |
5706 | |
5707 ** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections. | |
5708 | |
5709 X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in | |
5710 compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the | |
5711 list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste | |
5712 selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system | |
5713 compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system. | |
5714 | |
5715 ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay' | |
5716 were changed. | |
5717 | |
5718 ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs | |
5719 now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode. | |
5720 | |
5721 ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from | |
5722 initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode, | |
5723 instead of using default-major-mode. | |
5724 | |
5725 ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave | |
5726 like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far | |
5727 as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t | |
5728 (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it | |
5729 visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option | |
5730 is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes | |
5731 to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does. | |
5732 | |
5733 This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the | |
5734 NEWS. | |
5735 | |
5736 | |
5737 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2 | |
5738 | |
5739 ** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively | |
5740 have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up, | |
5741 and the latter now controls scrolling down. | |
5742 | |
5743 ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can | |
5744 be used to transform filenames found in compilation output. | |
5745 | |
5746 | |
5747 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 | |
5748 | |
5749 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and | |
5750 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra | |
5751 charsets in this release. | |
5752 | |
5753 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. | |
5754 | |
5755 ** Support for LynxOS has been added. | |
5756 | |
5757 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for | |
5758 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' | |
5759 to list them. | |
5760 | |
5761 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which | |
5762 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the | |
5763 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to | |
5764 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any | |
5765 necessary changes to unexec. | |
5766 | |
5767 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit | |
5768 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. | |
5769 | |
5770 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs | |
5771 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. | |
5772 | |
5773 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using | |
5774 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
5775 | |
5776 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement | |
5777 all of the new display features described below. The port currently | |
5778 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the | |
5779 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the | |
5780 description of aspects specific to the Mac. | |
5781 | |
5782 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the | |
5783 new display features described below. | |
5784 | |
5785 | |
5786 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 | |
5787 | |
5788 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
5789 | |
5790 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
5791 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
5792 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
5793 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
5794 the text. | |
5795 | |
5796 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
5797 | |
5798 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
5799 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
5800 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
5801 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
5802 specify a font. | |
5803 | |
5804 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
5805 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
5806 under Lisp changes, below. | |
5807 | |
5808 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
5809 | |
5810 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
5811 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
5812 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
5813 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
5814 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
5815 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored | |
5816 on terminals. | |
5817 | |
5818 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now | |
5819 supported on character terminals. | |
5820 | |
5821 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of | |
5822 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the | |
5823 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on | |
5824 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option. | |
5825 | |
5826 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. | |
5827 | |
5828 ** Sound support | |
5829 | |
5830 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware | |
5831 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently | |
5832 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). | |
5833 You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable | |
5834 sound support. | |
5835 | |
5836 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. | |
5837 | |
5838 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are | |
5839 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it | |
5840 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum | |
5841 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: | |
5842 | |
5843 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
5844 | |
5845 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
5846 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
5847 specifies a number of lines. | |
5848 | |
5849 Default is 0.25. | |
5850 | |
5851 - User option: resize-mini-windows | |
5852 | |
5853 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always | |
5854 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows | |
5855 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk | |
5856 again. | |
5857 | |
5858 Default is `grow-only'. | |
5859 | |
5860 ** LessTif support. | |
5861 | |
5862 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see | |
5863 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later. | |
5864 | |
5865 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
5866 | |
5867 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
5868 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is | |
5869 non-nil. | |
5870 | |
5871 ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported. | |
5872 | |
5873 When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version | |
5874 now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a | |
5875 file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog. | |
5876 | |
5877 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
5878 | |
5879 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for | |
5880 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when | |
5881 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
5882 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
5883 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
5884 Emacs. | |
5885 | |
5886 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
5887 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
5888 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
5889 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
5890 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
5891 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
5892 | |
5893 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
5894 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
5895 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
5896 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
5897 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
5898 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
5899 | |
5900 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
5901 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
5902 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
5903 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
5904 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
5905 | |
5906 ** Tool bar support. | |
5907 | |
5908 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
5909 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level | |
5910 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is | |
5911 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved | |
5912 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome | |
5913 icons will be used. | |
5914 | |
5915 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons | |
5916 for specific modes (with copyright assignments). | |
5917 | |
5918 ** Tooltips. | |
5919 | |
5920 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
5921 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can | |
5922 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
5923 | |
5924 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
5925 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
5926 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
5927 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
5928 | |
5929 ** Automatic Hscrolling | |
5930 | |
5931 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if | |
5932 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
5933 customized. | |
5934 | |
5935 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or | |
5936 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound | |
5937 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll | |
5938 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more | |
5939 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. | |
5940 | |
5941 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor | |
5942 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is | |
5943 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option | |
5944 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the | |
5945 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if | |
5946 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. | |
5947 | |
5948 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
5949 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
5950 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
5951 customizing face `fringe'. | |
5952 | |
5953 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. | |
5954 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. | |
5955 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D | |
5956 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line | |
5957 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of | |
5958 the window to be partially obscured.) | |
5959 | |
5960 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older | |
5961 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated. | |
5962 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be | |
5963 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face. | |
5964 | |
5965 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
5966 | |
5967 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all | |
5968 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a | |
5969 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the | |
5970 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is | |
5971 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you | |
5972 have enabled one. | |
5973 | |
5974 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
5975 | |
5976 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer. | |
5977 | |
5978 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer. | |
5979 | |
5980 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or | |
5981 `*') toggles the status. | |
5982 | |
5983 - Mouse-3 on the major mode name displays a major mode menu. | |
5984 | |
5985 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. | |
5986 | |
5987 ** Hourglass pointer | |
5988 | |
5989 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can | |
5990 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
5991 | |
5992 ** Blinking cursor | |
5993 | |
5994 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
5995 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
5996 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
5997 the group `cursor'. | |
5998 | |
5999 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. | |
6000 | |
6001 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
6002 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
6003 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
6004 details. | |
6005 | |
6006 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
6007 have to do anything to activate it. | |
6008 | |
6009 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed. | |
6010 | |
6011 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to | |
6012 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys. | |
6013 | |
6014 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen | |
6015 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace | |
6016 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the | |
6017 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to | |
6018 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On | |
6019 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two | |
6020 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is | |
6021 set to nil, and these keys delete backward. | |
6022 | |
6023 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes | |
6024 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the | |
6025 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via | |
6026 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on | |
6027 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only | |
6028 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. | |
6029 | |
6030 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode | |
6031 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys. | |
6032 | |
6033 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been | |
6034 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a | |
6035 buffer by default. | |
6036 | |
6037 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the | |
6038 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the | |
6039 beginning and end of the buffer. | |
6040 | |
6041 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the | |
6042 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is | |
6043 signaled. | |
6044 | |
6045 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init | |
6046 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. | |
6047 | |
6048 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't | |
6049 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
6050 this behavior. | |
6051 | |
6052 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte | |
6053 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let | |
6054 Emacs dump core. | |
6055 | |
6056 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
6057 | |
6058 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
6059 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
6060 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
6061 | |
6062 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is | |
6063 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is | |
6064 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. | |
6065 | |
6066 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set | |
6067 using that menu. | |
6068 | |
6069 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. | |
6070 | |
6071 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
6072 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
6073 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
6074 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
6075 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
6076 whitespace. | |
6077 | |
6078 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes | |
6079 all frames except the selected one. | |
6080 | |
6081 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to | |
6082 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. | |
6083 | |
6084 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs | |
6085 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), | |
6086 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. | |
6087 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option | |
6088 `Info-use-header-line'. | |
6089 | |
6090 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card | |
6091 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', | |
6092 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. | |
6093 | |
6094 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. | |
6095 | |
6096 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is | |
6097 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in | |
6098 `fr-drdref.tex'. | |
6099 | |
6100 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not | |
6101 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the | |
6102 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode | |
6103 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. | |
6104 | |
6105 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize. | |
6106 | |
6107 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path' | |
6108 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still | |
6109 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your | |
6110 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general. | |
6111 | |
6112 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at | |
6113 point in a pop-up window. | |
6114 | |
6115 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) | |
6116 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or | |
6117 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. | |
6118 | |
6119 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' | |
6120 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. | |
6121 | |
6122 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a | |
6123 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
6124 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) | |
6125 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location. | |
6126 | |
6127 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. | |
6128 | |
6129 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil | |
6130 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
6131 | |
6132 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the | |
6133 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add | |
6134 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. | |
6135 | |
6136 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will | |
6137 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is | |
6138 non-nil. | |
6139 | |
6140 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be | |
6141 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a | |
6142 file that is already visited under a different name. | |
6143 | |
6144 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to | |
6145 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. | |
6146 | |
6147 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name | |
6148 and displays information about that. | |
6149 | |
6150 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular | |
6151 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. | |
6152 | |
6153 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to | |
6154 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a | |
6155 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be | |
6156 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the | |
6157 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode | |
6158 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. | |
6159 | |
6160 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is | |
6161 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. | |
6162 | |
6163 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if | |
6164 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer | |
6165 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or | |
6166 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and | |
6167 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, | |
6168 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. | |
6169 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. | |
6170 | |
6171 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have | |
6172 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
6173 | |
6174 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding | |
6175 system for keyboard input. | |
6176 | |
6177 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' | |
6178 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's | |
6179 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores | |
6180 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is | |
6181 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you | |
6182 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to | |
6183 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c | |
6184 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 | |
6185 RET C-x C-f filename RET. | |
6186 | |
6187 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the | |
6188 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. | |
6189 | |
6190 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and | |
6191 displays all characters in that character set. | |
6192 | |
6193 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based | |
6194 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. | |
6195 | |
6196 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment | |
6197 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the | |
6198 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. | |
6199 | |
6200 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. | |
6201 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets | |
6202 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). | |
6203 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have | |
6204 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. | |
6205 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) | |
6206 and Polish `slash'. | |
6207 | |
6208 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. | |
6209 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations | |
6210 of the tutorial. | |
6211 | |
6212 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for | |
6213 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs | |
6214 Lisp Coding Convention". | |
6215 | |
6216 new command old-binding | |
6217 --- ------- ----------- | |
6218 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 | |
6219 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 | |
6220 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 | |
6221 | |
6222 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged | |
6223 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged | |
6224 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged | |
6225 | |
6226 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 | |
6227 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 | |
6228 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 | |
6229 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 | |
6230 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged | |
6231 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 | |
6232 | |
6233 ** There are new Leim input methods. | |
6234 New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix", | |
6235 "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim | |
6236 package. | |
6237 | |
6238 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the | |
6239 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus | |
6240 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating | |
6241 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input | |
6242 "`", you must type "=q". | |
6243 | |
6244 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO | |
6245 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display | |
6246 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of | |
6247 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a | |
6248 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this | |
6249 on. | |
6250 | |
6251 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based | |
6252 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, | |
6253 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region | |
6254 commenting with the variable `comment-style'. | |
6255 | |
6256 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and | |
6257 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
6258 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
6259 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
6260 | |
6261 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines | |
6262 on the display using several methods | |
6263 | |
6264 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be | |
6265 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
6266 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
6267 | |
6268 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is | |
6269 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. | |
6270 | |
6271 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. | |
6272 | |
6273 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
6274 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
6275 | |
6276 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create | |
6277 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The | |
6278 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, | |
6279 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. | |
6280 | |
6281 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and | |
6282 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, | |
6283 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
6284 | |
6285 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 | |
6286 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
6287 | |
6288 ** New X resources recognized | |
6289 | |
6290 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies | |
6291 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
6292 is useful for debugging X problems. | |
6293 | |
6294 Example: | |
6295 | |
6296 emacs.synchronous: true | |
6297 | |
6298 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the | |
6299 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
6300 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, | |
6301 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
6302 visual class names are | |
6303 | |
6304 TrueColor | |
6305 PseudoColor | |
6306 DirectColor | |
6307 StaticColor | |
6308 GrayScale | |
6309 StaticGray | |
6310 | |
6311 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
6312 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
6313 meaning. | |
6314 | |
6315 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes | |
6316 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
6317 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
6318 visual. | |
6319 | |
6320 Example: | |
6321 | |
6322 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 | |
6323 | |
6324 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
6325 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
6326 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
6327 resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
6328 | |
6329 Example: | |
6330 | |
6331 emacs.privateColormap: true | |
6332 | |
6333 ** Faces and frame parameters. | |
6334 | |
6335 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
6336 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
6337 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
6338 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
6339 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
6340 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
6341 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
6342 | |
6343 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
6344 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
6345 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the | |
6346 `default' face and vice versa. | |
6347 | |
6348 ** New face `menu'. | |
6349 | |
6350 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
6351 | |
6352 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. | |
6353 | |
6354 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
6355 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
6356 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
6357 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
6358 | |
6359 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
6360 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
6361 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
6362 | |
6363 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
6364 `ScreenGamma'. | |
6365 | |
6366 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
6367 | |
6368 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
6369 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
6370 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
6371 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
6372 | |
6373 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
6374 | |
6375 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". | |
6376 | |
6377 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
6378 | |
6379 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the | |
6380 LessTif/Motif one. | |
6381 | |
6382 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in | |
6383 LessTif and Motif. | |
6384 | |
6385 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. | |
6386 | |
6387 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
6388 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
6389 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
6390 | |
6391 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a | |
6392 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less). | |
6393 | |
6394 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
6395 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
6396 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
6397 | |
6398 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. | |
6399 | |
6400 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
6401 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a | |
6402 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
6403 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. | |
6404 | |
6405 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
6406 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a | |
6407 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that | |
6408 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. | |
6409 | |
6410 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either | |
6411 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. | |
6412 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special | |
6413 buffers. | |
6414 | |
6415 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. | |
6416 | |
6417 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows | |
6418 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
6419 `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
6420 | |
6421 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives | |
6422 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
6423 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
6424 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
6425 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
6426 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
6427 | |
6428 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
6429 | |
6430 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
6431 notably at the end of lines. | |
6432 | |
6433 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
6434 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
6435 | |
6436 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'. | |
6437 | |
6438 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle', | |
6439 but inserts text instead of replacing it. | |
6440 | |
6441 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like | |
6442 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
6443 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
6444 | |
6445 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets | |
6446 you edit the replacement string. | |
6447 | |
6448 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB' | |
6449 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases | |
6450 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol. | |
6451 | |
6452 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. | |
6453 | |
6454 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set | |
6455 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
6456 | |
6457 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains | |
6458 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and | |
6459 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus | |
6460 displayed by Emacs now have help strings. | |
6461 | |
6462 -- | |
6463 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to | |
6464 read mail from the menu etc. | |
6465 | |
6466 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. | |
6467 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on | |
6468 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made | |
6469 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. | |
6470 | |
6471 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the | |
6472 MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
6473 | |
6474 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version | |
6475 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. | |
6476 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons | |
6477 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, | |
6478 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version | |
6479 of Emacs. | |
6480 | |
6481 ** Customize changes | |
6482 | |
6483 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
6484 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to | |
6485 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that | |
6486 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in | |
6487 earlier versions of Emacs. | |
6488 | |
6489 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
6490 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
6491 default). | |
6492 | |
6493 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it | |
6494 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init | |
6495 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would | |
6496 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init | |
6497 file. | |
6498 | |
6499 ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it | |
6500 does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to | |
6501 avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are | |
6502 already in your init file. | |
6503 | |
6504 ** New features in evaluation commands | |
6505 | |
6506 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp | |
6507 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables | |
6508 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new | |
6509 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
6510 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
6511 | |
6512 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4 | |
6513 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most | |
6514 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if | |
6515 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is | |
6516 printed). | |
6517 | |
6518 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated | |
6519 printed representation and an unabbreviated one. | |
6520 | |
6521 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error | |
6522 during evaluation produces a backtrace. | |
6523 | |
6524 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments | |
6525 code when called with a prefix argument. | |
6526 | |
6527 ** CC mode changes. | |
6528 | |
6529 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
6530 current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
6531 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
6532 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
6533 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
6534 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
6535 release. | |
6536 | |
6537 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. | |
6538 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode | |
6539 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much | |
6540 confusion. | |
6541 | |
6542 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the | |
6543 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for | |
6544 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't | |
6545 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. | |
6546 | |
6547 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. | |
6548 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: | |
6549 | |
6550 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening | |
6551 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". | |
6552 | |
6553 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening | |
6554 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. | |
6555 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the | |
6556 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". | |
6557 | |
6558 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. | |
6559 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made | |
6560 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an | |
6561 earlier statement. An example: | |
6562 | |
6563 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) | |
6564 if (a[i]) | |
6565 res += a[i]->offset; | |
6566 else | |
6567 | |
6568 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it | |
6569 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after | |
6570 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's | |
6571 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of | |
6572 the preceding "if". | |
6573 | |
6574 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on | |
6575 by default. | |
6576 | |
6577 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. | |
6578 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which | |
6579 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing | |
6580 documentation or other natural language text. | |
6581 | |
6582 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that | |
6583 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in | |
6584 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline | |
6585 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed | |
6586 to other strings that typically contain format specifications, | |
6587 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses | |
6588 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. | |
6589 | |
6590 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. | |
6591 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the | |
6592 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in | |
6593 comment prefixes and paragraph starts. | |
6594 | |
6595 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. | |
6596 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment | |
6597 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This | |
6598 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in | |
6599 Pike mode only. | |
6600 | |
6601 *** Better handling of syntactic errors. | |
6602 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been | |
6603 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message | |
6604 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the | |
6605 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no | |
6606 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while | |
6607 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error | |
6608 is reported afterwards. | |
6609 | |
6610 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. | |
6611 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by | |
6612 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. | |
6613 | |
6614 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. | |
6615 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending | |
6616 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now | |
6617 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some | |
6618 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the | |
6619 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the | |
6620 groundwork. | |
6621 | |
6622 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. | |
6623 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior | |
6624 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for | |
6625 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might | |
6626 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't | |
6627 have to bother. | |
6628 | |
6629 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing | |
6630 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally | |
6631 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. | |
6632 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of | |
6633 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" | |
6634 by default) to override the global settings made by the user. | |
6635 | |
6636 *** New initialization procedure for the style system. | |
6637 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
6638 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
6639 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
6640 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
6641 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
6642 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
6643 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
6644 | |
6645 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
6646 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
6647 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
6648 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
6649 above. | |
6650 | |
6651 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
6652 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
6653 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
6654 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
6655 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
6656 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
6657 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
6658 function documentation for more info. | |
6659 | |
6660 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
6661 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
6662 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
6663 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
6664 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
6665 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
6666 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
6667 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
6668 | |
6669 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
6670 | |
6671 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
6672 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
6673 | |
6674 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
6675 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
6676 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
6677 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
6678 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
6679 style system. | |
6680 | |
6681 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
6682 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
6683 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
6684 as far as possible. | |
6685 | |
6686 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
6687 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
6688 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
6689 chapter about this in the manual. | |
6690 | |
6691 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
6692 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
6693 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
6694 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
6695 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
6696 | |
6697 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
6698 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
6699 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
6700 | |
6701 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
6702 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
6703 | |
6704 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
6705 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
6706 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
6707 inside CC Mode. | |
6708 | |
6709 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
6710 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
6711 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
6712 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
6713 cc-mode/). | |
6714 | |
6715 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and | |
6716 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and | |
6717 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the | |
6718 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as | |
6719 they were before the filling. | |
6720 | |
6721 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
6722 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
6723 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
6724 literals. | |
6725 | |
6726 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
6727 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
6728 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
6729 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
6730 this function. | |
6731 | |
6732 *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
6733 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
6734 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
6735 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
6736 Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
6737 | |
6738 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
6739 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
6740 opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
6741 | |
6742 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
6743 | |
6744 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
6745 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
6746 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
6747 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
6748 | |
6749 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
6750 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
6751 the column specified by comment-column. | |
6752 | |
6753 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
6754 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
6755 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
6756 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
6757 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
6758 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
6759 | |
6760 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
6761 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
6762 arguments. | |
6763 | |
6764 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
6765 | |
6766 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
6767 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
6768 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
6769 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
6770 Provan). | |
6771 | |
6772 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
6773 | |
6774 ** Dired changes | |
6775 | |
6776 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
6777 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
6778 is, delete only empty directories. | |
6779 | |
6780 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
6781 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
6782 copy directories recursively. | |
6783 | |
6784 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' | |
6785 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with | |
6786 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. | |
6787 | |
6788 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') | |
6789 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or | |
6790 directory. | |
6791 | |
6792 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows | |
6793 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. | |
6794 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so | |
6795 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as | |
6796 accurate or inaccurate as it is. | |
6797 | |
6798 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' | |
6799 from ls switches. | |
6800 | |
6801 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use | |
6802 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, | |
6803 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single | |
6804 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. | |
6805 | |
6806 ** Gnus changes. | |
6807 | |
6808 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in | |
6809 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, | |
6810 internationalization and mail-fetching. | |
6811 | |
6812 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the | |
6813 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. | |
6814 | |
6815 If you used procmail like in | |
6816 | |
6817 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t) | |
6818 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) | |
6819 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") | |
6820 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") | |
6821 | |
6822 this now has changed to | |
6823 | |
6824 (setq mail-sources | |
6825 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" | |
6826 :suffix ".in"))) | |
6827 | |
6828 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> | |
6829 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources | |
6830 | |
6831 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of | |
6832 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. | |
6833 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no | |
6834 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. | |
6835 | |
6836 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to | |
6837 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was | |
6838 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. | |
6839 | |
6840 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many | |
6841 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There | |
6842 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is | |
6843 now just a compatibility layer. | |
6844 | |
6845 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in | |
6846 Gnus facilities. | |
6847 | |
6848 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be | |
6849 called to position point. | |
6850 | |
6851 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in | |
6852 summary buffers and NOV files. | |
6853 | |
6854 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number | |
6855 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. | |
6856 | |
6857 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a | |
6858 subtly different manner. | |
6859 | |
6860 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive | |
6861 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with | |
6862 ever-changing layouts. | |
6863 | |
6864 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. | |
6865 | |
6866 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. | |
6867 | |
6868 ** Changes in Texinfo mode. | |
6869 | |
6870 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo | |
6871 macros | |
6872 | |
6873 Key binding Macro | |
6874 ------------------------- | |
6875 C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
6876 C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
6877 C-c C-c u @uref | |
6878 C-c C-c q @quotation | |
6879 C-c C-c m @email | |
6880 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> | |
6881 M-RET @item | |
6882 | |
6883 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. | |
6884 | |
6885 ** Changes in Outline mode. | |
6886 | |
6887 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command | |
6888 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to | |
6889 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. | |
6890 | |
6891 ** Changes to Emacs Server | |
6892 | |
6893 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do | |
6894 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers | |
6895 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with | |
6896 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which | |
6897 buffers to kill, as before. | |
6898 | |
6899 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, | |
6900 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in | |
6901 this way. | |
6902 | |
6903 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options | |
6904 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE. | |
6905 | |
6906 ** Changes to Show Paren mode. | |
6907 | |
6908 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. | |
6909 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to | |
6910 use. Default is 1000. | |
6911 | |
6912 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren | |
6913 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
6914 | |
6915 ** Changes to hideshow.el | |
6916 | |
6917 *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
6918 | |
6919 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), | |
6920 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp | |
6921 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. | |
6922 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. | |
6923 | |
6924 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, | |
6925 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can | |
6926 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of | |
6927 the open block. | |
6928 | |
6929 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a | |
6930 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of | |
6931 the normal block-hiding function. | |
6932 | |
6933 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. | |
6934 | |
6935 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, | |
6936 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix | |
6937 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation | |
6938 for `hs-minor-mode'. | |
6939 | |
6940 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and | |
6941 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t. | |
6942 | |
6943 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions | |
6944 | |
6945 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes | |
6946 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making | |
6947 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. | |
6948 | |
6949 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the | |
6950 current buffer. | |
6951 | |
6952 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries | |
6953 in a log file. | |
6954 | |
6955 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log | |
6956 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. | |
6957 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's | |
6958 version number is performed based on regular expressions from | |
6959 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. | |
6960 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. | |
6961 | |
6962 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. | |
6963 | |
6964 ** Changes to cmuscheme | |
6965 | |
6966 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed | |
6967 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. | |
6968 | |
6969 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
6970 | |
6971 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove | |
6972 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. | |
6973 | |
6974 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should | |
6975 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. | |
6976 | |
6977 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose | |
6978 the face used for each string/comment. | |
6979 | |
6980 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. | |
6981 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". | |
6982 | |
6983 ** Changes to Shell mode | |
6984 | |
6985 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer | |
6986 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a | |
6987 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a | |
6988 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name). | |
6989 | |
6990 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
6991 | |
6992 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which | |
6993 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. | |
6994 | |
6995 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters. | |
6996 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and | |
6997 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the | |
6998 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character, | |
6999 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to | |
7000 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default. | |
7001 | |
7002 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' | |
7003 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which | |
7004 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the | |
7005 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use | |
7006 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, | |
7007 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this | |
7008 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option | |
7009 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. | |
7010 | |
7011 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes | |
7012 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. | |
7013 | |
7014 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and | |
7015 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current | |
7016 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
7017 | |
7018 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
7019 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
7020 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
7021 | |
7022 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, | |
7023 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, | |
7024 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. | |
7025 | |
7026 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') | |
7027 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix | |
7028 argument, it appends to the file. | |
7029 | |
7030 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' | |
7031 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for | |
7032 compatibility. | |
7033 | |
7034 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input | |
7035 ring (history). | |
7036 | |
7037 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for | |
7038 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp | |
7039 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". | |
7040 | |
7041 ** Changes to Rmail mode | |
7042 | |
7043 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be | |
7044 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when | |
7045 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the | |
7046 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
7047 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
7048 as correspondent. | |
7049 | |
7050 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
7051 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
7052 regexp matching your mail addresses. | |
7053 | |
7054 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how | |
7055 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
7056 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
7057 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
7058 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
7059 | |
7060 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, | |
7061 like `j'. | |
7062 | |
7063 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that | |
7064 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a | |
7065 digest message. | |
7066 | |
7067 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies | |
7068 in which folder to put messages automatically. | |
7069 | |
7070 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message | |
7071 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly | |
7072 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. | |
7073 | |
7074 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify | |
7075 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address. | |
7076 | |
7077 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to | |
7078 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
7079 | |
7080 ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the | |
7081 current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in | |
7082 the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'. | |
7083 This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded | |
7084 by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be | |
7085 displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file. | |
7086 | |
7087 If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system | |
7088 other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable | |
7089 `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system. | |
7090 | |
7091 ** Changes to TeX mode | |
7092 | |
7093 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to | |
7094 `latex-mode'. | |
7095 | |
7096 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. | |
7097 | |
7098 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. | |
7099 | |
7100 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode. | |
7101 | |
7102 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
7103 | |
7104 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
7105 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
7106 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
7107 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
7108 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
7109 can be edited from that buffer. | |
7110 | |
7111 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
7112 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
7113 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
7114 | |
7115 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
7116 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
7117 | |
7118 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
7119 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
7120 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
7121 been cited. | |
7122 | |
7123 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. | |
7124 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading | |
7125 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' | |
7126 in column 1 are always made leaves. | |
7127 | |
7128 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) | |
7129 has the following new features: | |
7130 | |
7131 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
7132 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
7133 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
7134 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
7135 | |
7136 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
7137 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
7138 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
7139 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
7140 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
7141 defaults to 1. | |
7142 | |
7143 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in | |
7144 file names. | |
7145 | |
7146 ** Ispell changes | |
7147 | |
7148 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if | |
7149 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it | |
7150 spell-checks the current buffer. | |
7151 | |
7152 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been | |
7153 added. | |
7154 | |
7155 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling | |
7156 correction is made and re-checked. | |
7157 | |
7158 *** Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definitions have been added. | |
7159 | |
7160 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some | |
7161 cases. | |
7162 | |
7163 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict | |
7164 on syntax errors. | |
7165 | |
7166 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the | |
7167 end of the buffer. | |
7168 | |
7169 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs. | |
7170 | |
7171 *** The variable `ispell-format-word' has been renamed to | |
7172 `ispell-format-word-function'. The old name is still available as | |
7173 alias. | |
7174 | |
7175 ** Makefile mode changes | |
7176 | |
7177 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
7178 | |
7179 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when | |
7180 Fontlock mode is active. | |
7181 | |
7182 ** Isearch changes | |
7183 | |
7184 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, | |
7185 so that searches can be resumed. | |
7186 | |
7187 *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, | |
7188 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys | |
7189 that started the search. | |
7190 | |
7191 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current | |
7192 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. | |
7193 | |
7194 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. | |
7195 | |
7196 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable | |
7197 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current | |
7198 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
7199 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
7200 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
7201 `secondary-selection'. | |
7202 | |
7203 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
7204 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
7205 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
7206 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
7207 usual snappy response. | |
7208 | |
7209 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
7210 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
7211 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
7212 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
7213 | |
7214 ** VC Changes | |
7215 | |
7216 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it | |
7217 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp | |
7218 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism | |
7219 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has | |
7220 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable | |
7221 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify | |
7222 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, | |
7223 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the | |
7224 file is registered in that backend. | |
7225 | |
7226 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed | |
7227 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the | |
7228 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for | |
7229 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then | |
7230 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. | |
7231 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. | |
7232 | |
7233 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC | |
7234 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for | |
7235 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables | |
7236 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS | |
7237 where it doesn't make sense.) | |
7238 | |
7239 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also | |
7240 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude | |
7241 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. | |
7242 | |
7243 *** General Changes | |
7244 | |
7245 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding | |
7246 checks are always done now. | |
7247 | |
7248 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control | |
7249 operations. | |
7250 | |
7251 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. | |
7252 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. | |
7253 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. | |
7254 | |
7255 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the | |
7256 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the | |
7257 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into | |
7258 the working file (``merge news''). | |
7259 | |
7260 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r | |
7261 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work | |
7262 downwards. | |
7263 | |
7264 *** Multiple Backends | |
7265 | |
7266 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is | |
7267 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS | |
7268 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally | |
7269 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your | |
7270 local RCS archives. | |
7271 | |
7272 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) | |
7273 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' | |
7274 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of | |
7275 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) | |
7276 | |
7277 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing | |
7278 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as | |
7279 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend | |
7280 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the | |
7281 current revision number from the more remote backend. | |
7282 | |
7283 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to | |
7284 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change | |
7285 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to | |
7286 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. | |
7287 | |
7288 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your | |
7289 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the | |
7290 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry | |
7291 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. | |
7292 | |
7293 *** Changes for CVS | |
7294 | |
7295 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the | |
7296 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in | |
7297 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined | |
7298 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a | |
7299 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts | |
7300 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC | |
7301 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. | |
7302 | |
7303 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of | |
7304 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and | |
7305 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without | |
7306 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version | |
7307 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version | |
7308 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ | |
7309 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter | |
7310 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, | |
7311 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted | |
7312 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, | |
7313 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file | |
7314 name.) | |
7315 | |
7316 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the | |
7317 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. | |
7318 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to | |
7319 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the | |
7320 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an | |
7321 entire directory tree. | |
7322 | |
7323 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call | |
7324 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option | |
7325 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are | |
7326 "watched" by other developers.) | |
7327 | |
7328 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r | |
7329 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give | |
7330 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', | |
7331 starting at the given directory. | |
7332 | |
7333 *** Lisp Changes in VC | |
7334 | |
7335 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now | |
7336 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a | |
7337 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and | |
7338 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for | |
7339 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which | |
7340 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top | |
7341 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, | |
7342 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol | |
7343 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. | |
7344 | |
7345 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT | |
7346 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more | |
7347 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. | |
7348 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. | |
7349 | |
7350 ** New modes and packages | |
7351 | |
7352 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' | |
7353 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when | |
7354 the default is not applicable. | |
7355 | |
7356 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, | |
7357 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The | |
7358 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. | |
7359 | |
7360 Features are: | |
7361 | |
7362 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is | |
7363 drawn, like this: | \ / | |
7364 --+-- X | |
7365 | / \ | |
7366 | |
7367 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the | |
7368 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If | |
7369 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a | |
7370 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will | |
7371 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line | |
7372 you are drawing. | |
7373 | |
7374 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) | |
7375 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. | |
7376 | |
7377 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by | |
7378 flood-filling. | |
7379 | |
7380 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular | |
7381 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be | |
7382 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in | |
7383 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. | |
7384 | |
7385 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can | |
7386 also do without the mouse. | |
7387 | |
7388 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to | |
7389 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares | |
7390 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your | |
7391 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, | |
7392 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. | |
7393 | |
7394 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: | |
7395 | |
7396 lines straight-lines | |
7397 rectangles squares | |
7398 poly-lines straight poly-lines | |
7399 ellipses circles | |
7400 text (see-thru) text (overwrite) | |
7401 spray-can setting size for spraying | |
7402 vaporize line vaporize lines | |
7403 erase characters erase rectangles | |
7404 | |
7405 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or | |
7406 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in | |
7407 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while | |
7408 drawing. | |
7409 | |
7410 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines | |
7411 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are | |
7412 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired | |
7413 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. | |
7414 | |
7415 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this | |
7416 can be turned off). | |
7417 | |
7418 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell | |
7419 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. | |
7420 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp | |
7421 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports | |
7422 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It | |
7423 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of | |
7424 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been | |
7425 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, | |
7426 all within the scope of your Emacs process. | |
7427 | |
7428 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time | |
7429 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the | |
7430 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working | |
7431 on certain projects. | |
7432 | |
7433 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches | |
7434 of interactively entered regexps. For example, | |
7435 | |
7436 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET | |
7437 | |
7438 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background | |
7439 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are | |
7440 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. | |
7441 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of | |
7442 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the | |
7443 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the | |
7444 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches | |
7445 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. | |
7446 | |
7447 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when | |
7448 Emacs is idle. | |
7449 | |
7450 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text | |
7451 fragments in accordance with the current major mode. | |
7452 | |
7453 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML | |
7454 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. | |
7455 | |
7456 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el | |
7457 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should | |
7458 be more robust while offering the same functionality. | |
7459 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only | |
7460 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. | |
7461 | |
7462 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags | |
7463 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
7464 separate Texinfo file. | |
7465 | |
7466 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or | |
7467 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) | |
7468 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with | |
7469 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to | |
7470 enter check-in log messages. | |
7471 | |
7472 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages | |
7473 without invoking external programs. | |
7474 | |
7475 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
7476 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
7477 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
7478 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
7479 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. | |
7480 | |
7481 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
7482 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
7483 | |
7484 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for | |
7485 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
7486 | |
7487 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
7488 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
7489 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
7490 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
7491 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
7492 single step. | |
7493 | |
7494 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
7495 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
7496 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
7497 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
7498 | |
7499 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes | |
7500 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
7501 actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
7502 | |
7503 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in | |
7504 PostScript. | |
7505 | |
7506 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
7507 | |
7508 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
7509 | |
7510 ; comment (until end of line) | |
7511 A non-terminal | |
7512 "C" terminal | |
7513 ?C? special | |
7514 $A default non-terminal | |
7515 $"C" default terminal | |
7516 $?C? default special | |
7517 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
7518 C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
7519 C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
7520 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
7521 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
7522 (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
7523 [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
7524 C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
7525 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
7526 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
7527 {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
7528 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
7529 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
7530 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
7531 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
7532 | |
7533 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
7534 | |
7535 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x | |
7536 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
7537 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
7538 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
7539 equal signs of assignments. | |
7540 | |
7541 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting | |
7542 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. | |
7543 | |
7544 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to | |
7545 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
7546 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. | |
7547 | |
7548 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. | |
7549 | |
7550 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to | |
7551 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
7552 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
7553 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
7554 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
7555 which answers different needs. | |
7556 | |
7557 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights | |
7558 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside | |
7559 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of | |
7560 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with | |
7561 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode | |
7562 to be enabled. | |
7563 | |
7564 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files | |
7565 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. | |
7566 | |
7567 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. | |
7568 | |
7569 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the | |
7570 current line in the current buffer. It also provides | |
7571 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers. | |
7572 | |
7573 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
7574 | |
7575 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and | |
7576 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will | |
7577 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to | |
7578 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This | |
7579 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground | |
7580 and background colors. | |
7581 | |
7582 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object | |
7583 Pascal) language. | |
7584 | |
7585 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on | |
7586 the text at point. | |
7587 | |
7588 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
7589 | |
7590 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. | |
7591 | |
7592 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus | |
7593 whitespace in a file. | |
7594 | |
7595 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript | |
7596 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
7597 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
7598 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
7599 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
7600 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
7601 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
7602 | |
7603 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
7604 | |
7605 Here is an example of columns: | |
7606 | |
7607 horse apple bus | |
7608 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
7609 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
7610 | |
7611 Doing the following settings: | |
7612 | |
7613 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
7614 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
7615 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
7616 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
7617 | |
7618 | |
7619 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
7620 | |
7621 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
7622 | |
7623 It results: | |
7624 | |
7625 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
7626 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
7627 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
7628 | |
7629 delim-col has the following options: | |
7630 | |
7631 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
7632 before all columns. | |
7633 | |
7634 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
7635 between each column. | |
7636 | |
7637 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
7638 after all columns. | |
7639 | |
7640 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
7641 each column. | |
7642 | |
7643 delim-col has the following commands: | |
7644 | |
7645 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
7646 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
7647 | |
7648 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were | |
7649 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a | |
7650 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the | |
7651 recent file list can be displayed: | |
7652 | |
7653 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. | |
7654 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. | |
7655 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory | |
7656 | |
7657 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to | |
7658 dynamically change the menu appearance. | |
7659 | |
7660 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header | |
7661 text. | |
7662 | |
7663 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use | |
7664 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't | |
7665 specific to Message mode. | |
7666 | |
7667 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for | |
7668 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
7669 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
7670 | |
7671 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user | |
7672 interface to access directory servers using different directory | |
7673 protocols. It has a separate manual. | |
7674 | |
7675 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files | |
7676 for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
7677 | |
7678 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. | |
7679 | |
7680 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the | |
7681 minibuffer with completion. | |
7682 | |
7683 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration | |
7684 with the diary features. | |
7685 | |
7686 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby | |
7687 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
7688 | |
7689 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto | |
7690 Fill mode. | |
7691 | |
7692 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion | |
7693 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main | |
7694 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning | |
7695 they can be profiled, debugged, etc. | |
7696 | |
7697 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files. | |
7698 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension | |
7699 `.g'. | |
7700 | |
7701 ** Changes in sort.el | |
7702 | |
7703 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' | |
7704 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The | |
7705 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default | |
7706 numeric base. | |
7707 | |
7708 ** Changes to Ange-ftp | |
7709 | |
7710 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file | |
7711 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash | |
7712 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
7713 | |
7714 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive | |
7715 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
7716 | |
7717 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which | |
7718 output ^M at the end of lines. | |
7719 | |
7720 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor | |
7721 mode `iswitchb-mode'. | |
7722 | |
7723 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. | |
7724 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with | |
7725 `(msb-mode 1)'. | |
7726 | |
7727 ** Changes in Flyspell mode | |
7728 | |
7729 *** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom | |
7730 group. | |
7731 | |
7732 *** The variable `flyspell-generic-check-word-p' has been renamed | |
7733 to `flyspell-generic-check-word-predicate'. The old name is still | |
7734 available as alias. | |
7735 | |
7736 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the | |
7737 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values | |
7738 are recognized: | |
7739 | |
7740 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; | |
7741 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; | |
7742 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; | |
7743 nil -- just delete one character. | |
7744 | |
7745 Default value is `untabify'. | |
7746 | |
7747 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] | |
7748 | |
7749 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face | |
7750 symbol, not double-quoted. | |
7751 | |
7752 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future | |
7753 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, | |
7754 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been | |
7755 moved to lisp/obsolete. | |
7756 | |
7757 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. | |
7758 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the | |
7759 `auto-compression-mode' command. | |
7760 | |
7761 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for | |
7762 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and | |
7763 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser. | |
7764 | |
7765 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to | |
7766 `browse-url-new-window-flag'. | |
7767 | |
7768 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now | |
7769 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. | |
7770 | |
7771 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It | |
7772 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. | |
7773 | |
7774 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM | |
7775 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, | |
7776 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the | |
7777 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands | |
7778 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a | |
7779 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. | |
7780 | |
7781 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts | |
7782 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
7783 | |
7784 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters. | |
7785 | |
7786 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the | |
7787 file you are visiting in Hexl mode. | |
7788 | |
7789 ** Shell script mode changes. | |
7790 | |
7791 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
7792 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and | |
7793 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. | |
7794 | |
7795 ** Etags changes. | |
7796 | |
7797 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
7798 | |
7799 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now | |
7800 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with | |
7801 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. | |
7802 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains | |
7803 a regular expression. The manual contains details. | |
7804 | |
7805 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function | |
7806 declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
7807 | |
7808 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
7809 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. | |
7810 | |
7811 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags | |
7812 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or | |
7813 `template' keywords. | |
7814 | |
7815 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in | |
7816 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. | |
7817 | |
7818 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and | |
7819 types. | |
7820 | |
7821 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. | |
7822 | |
7823 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
7824 | |
7825 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
7826 are now tagged. | |
7827 | |
7828 *** In makefiles, tags the targets. | |
7829 | |
7830 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local | |
7831 variables are tagged. | |
7832 | |
7833 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
7834 | |
7835 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is | |
7836 for PSWrap. | |
7837 | |
7838 ** Changes in etags.el | |
7839 | |
7840 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make | |
7841 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
7842 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
7843 | |
7844 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting | |
7845 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. | |
7846 | |
7847 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE | |
7848 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes | |
7849 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, | |
7850 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. | |
7851 | |
7852 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. | |
7853 | |
7854 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags | |
7855 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. | |
7856 | |
7857 A useful example value for this variable might be something like: | |
7858 | |
7859 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) | |
7860 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) | |
7861 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) | |
7862 | |
7863 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance | |
7864 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. | |
7865 | |
7866 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the | |
7867 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. | |
7868 | |
7869 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. | |
7870 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c | |
7871 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", | |
7872 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, | |
7873 point will go to the beginning of the file. | |
7874 | |
7875 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if | |
7876 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search | |
7877 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. | |
7878 | |
7879 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point | |
7880 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is | |
7881 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. | |
7882 | |
7883 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to | |
7884 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now | |
7885 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
7886 | |
7887 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
7888 | |
7889 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. | |
7890 | |
7891 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' | |
7892 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular | |
7893 expression from that list, are not checked. | |
7894 | |
7895 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. | |
7896 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, | |
7897 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert | |
7898 the buffer, just like for the local files. | |
7899 | |
7900 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. | |
7901 | |
7902 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now | |
7903 displays local abbrevs, only. | |
7904 | |
7905 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping | |
7906 paragraphs filled as you modify them. | |
7907 | |
7908 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse | |
7909 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value | |
7910 is measured in pixels. | |
7911 | |
7912 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files | |
7913 to be visited as images. | |
7914 | |
7915 ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command' | |
7916 were added to compile.el. | |
7917 | |
7918 ** Withdrawn packages | |
7919 | |
7920 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
7921 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
7922 | |
7923 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. | |
7924 | |
7925 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
7926 | |
7927 | |
7928 * Incompatible Lisp changes | |
7929 | |
7930 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and | |
7931 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. | |
7932 See the sections below for details. | |
7933 | |
7934 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom | |
7935 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. | |
7936 Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties' | |
7937 to remove the properties of the copy. | |
7938 | |
7939 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code | |
7940 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) | |
7941 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from | |
7942 these properties are active. | |
7943 | |
7944 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search | |
7945 ranges may affect some code. | |
7946 | |
7947 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook | |
7948 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might | |
7949 make a difference to some code. | |
7950 | |
7951 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which | |
7952 operates on the minibuffer. | |
7953 | |
7954 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' | |
7955 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce | |
7956 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters | |
7957 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). | |
7958 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate | |
7959 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading | |
7960 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE | |
7961 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program | |
7962 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte | |
7963 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as | |
7964 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in | |
7965 the buffer as multibyte characters. | |
7966 | |
7967 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal | |
7968 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only | |
7969 appropriate for reading truly binary files. | |
7970 | |
7971 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and | |
7972 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use | |
7973 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. | |
7974 | |
7975 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as | |
7976 long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat', | |
7977 such as `mapconcat'. | |
7978 | |
7979 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte | |
7980 string. | |
7981 | |
7982 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of | |
7983 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new | |
7984 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than | |
7985 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard | |
7986 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes | |
7987 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule | |
7988 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will | |
7989 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. | |
7990 | |
7991 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal. | |
7992 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be | |
7993 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should | |
7994 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and | |
7995 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the | |
7996 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It | |
7997 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to | |
7998 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well | |
7999 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value | |
8000 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed. | |
8001 | |
8002 | |
8003 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, | |
8004 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) | |
8005 | |
8006 ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all. | |
8007 | |
8008 ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el | |
8009 allows the animated display of strings. | |
8010 | |
8011 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the | |
8012 interactive form of a function. | |
8013 | |
8014 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies | |
8015 between custom options. Example: | |
8016 | |
8017 (defcustom default-input-method nil | |
8018 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). | |
8019 This is the input method activated automatically by the command | |
8020 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." | |
8021 :group 'mule | |
8022 :type '(choice (const nil) string) | |
8023 :set-after '(current-language-environment)) | |
8024 | |
8025 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after | |
8026 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears | |
8027 first in a custom-set-variables statement. | |
8028 | |
8029 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of | |
8030 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no | |
8031 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated | |
8032 (signal or normal termination). | |
8033 | |
8034 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements | |
8035 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. | |
8036 | |
8037 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil | |
8038 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
8039 | |
8040 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies | |
8041 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. | |
8042 | |
8043 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". | |
8044 | |
8045 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually | |
8046 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame | |
8047 being deleted. | |
8048 | |
8049 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. | |
8050 | |
8051 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. | |
8052 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of | |
8053 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends | |
8054 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is | |
8055 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's | |
8056 charset. | |
8057 | |
8058 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in | |
8059 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the | |
8060 message. | |
8061 | |
8062 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an | |
8063 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. | |
8064 | |
8065 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced | |
8066 with the more general `:mask' property. | |
8067 | |
8068 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. | |
8069 | |
8070 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a | |
8071 backslash. | |
8072 | |
8073 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs | |
8074 is running in batch mode. For example, | |
8075 | |
8076 (message "%s" (read t)) | |
8077 | |
8078 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result | |
8079 to standard output. | |
8080 | |
8081 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', | |
8082 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. | |
8083 | |
8084 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' | |
8085 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new | |
8086 frame or window. | |
8087 | |
8088 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences | |
8089 were added | |
8090 | |
8091 - Function: remove ELT SEQ | |
8092 | |
8093 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be | |
8094 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. | |
8095 | |
8096 - Function: remq ELT LIST | |
8097 | |
8098 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The | |
8099 comparison is done with `eq'. | |
8100 | |
8101 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. | |
8102 | |
8103 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table | |
8104 has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and | |
8105 `key-and-value', in addition to `nil', `key', `value', and `t'. | |
8106 | |
8107 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string | |
8108 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may | |
8109 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. | |
8110 | |
8111 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function | |
8112 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. | |
8113 | |
8114 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the | |
8115 function was declared obsolete. | |
8116 | |
8117 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is | |
8118 retained as an alias). | |
8119 | |
8120 ** Easy-menu's :filter now takes the unconverted form of the menu and | |
8121 the result is automatically converted to Emacs' form. | |
8122 | |
8123 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined | |
8124 | |
8125 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF | |
8126 | |
8127 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or | |
8128 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use | |
8129 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, | |
8130 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the | |
8131 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t | |
8132 means never include the minibuffer window. | |
8133 | |
8134 ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows | |
8135 | |
8136 - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT | |
8137 | |
8138 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. | |
8139 | |
8140 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', | |
8141 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as | |
8142 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil | |
8143 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is | |
8144 returned. | |
8145 | |
8146 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even | |
8147 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff | |
8148 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the | |
8149 minibuffer even if it is active. | |
8150 | |
8151 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer | |
8152 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count | |
8153 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame | |
8154 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, | |
8155 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you | |
8156 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. | |
8157 | |
8158 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. | |
8159 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. | |
8160 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. | |
8161 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. | |
8162 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. | |
8163 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. | |
8164 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. | |
8165 | |
8166 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and | |
8167 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional | |
8168 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. | |
8169 | |
8170 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a | |
8171 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that | |
8172 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. | |
8173 Default value is nil. | |
8174 | |
8175 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, | |
8176 meaning no limit. | |
8177 | |
8178 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls | |
8179 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line | |
8180 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200. | |
8181 | |
8182 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred | |
8183 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and | |
8184 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, | |
8185 | |
8186 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument | |
8187 list of a primitive. | |
8188 | |
8189 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. | |
8190 | |
8191 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the | |
8192 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. | |
8193 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather | |
8194 than replacing the local map. | |
8195 | |
8196 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and | |
8197 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been | |
8198 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' | |
8199 instead. | |
8200 | |
8201 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. | |
8202 | |
8203 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, | |
8204 as promised long ago. | |
8205 | |
8206 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. | |
8207 | |
8208 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems | |
8209 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but | |
8210 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names. | |
8211 | |
8212 | |
8213 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) | |
8214 | |
8215 ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for | |
8216 regular expressions. | |
8217 | |
8218 - Function: rx-to-string SEXP | |
8219 | |
8220 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. | |
8221 | |
8222 - Macro: rx SEXP | |
8223 | |
8224 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. | |
8225 | |
8226 The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp | |
8227 notation. | |
8228 | |
8229 STRING | |
8230 matches string STRING literally. | |
8231 | |
8232 CHAR | |
8233 matches character CHAR literally. | |
8234 | |
8235 `not-newline' | |
8236 matches any character except a newline. | |
8237 . | |
8238 `anything' | |
8239 matches any character | |
8240 | |
8241 `(any SET)' | |
8242 matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string. | |
8243 Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings. | |
8244 | |
8245 '(in SET)' | |
8246 like `any'. | |
8247 | |
8248 `(not (any SET))' | |
8249 matches any character not in SET | |
8250 | |
8251 `line-start' | |
8252 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line | |
8253 in the text being matched | |
8254 | |
8255 `line-end' | |
8256 is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line | |
8257 | |
8258 `string-start' | |
8259 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the | |
8260 string being matched against. | |
8261 | |
8262 `string-end' | |
8263 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the | |
8264 string being matched against. | |
8265 | |
8266 `buffer-start' | |
8267 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the | |
8268 buffer being matched against. | |
8269 | |
8270 `buffer-end' | |
8271 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the | |
8272 buffer being matched against. | |
8273 | |
8274 `point' | |
8275 matches the empty string, but only at point. | |
8276 | |
8277 `word-start' | |
8278 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a | |
8279 word. | |
8280 | |
8281 `word-end' | |
8282 matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. | |
8283 | |
8284 `word-boundary' | |
8285 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a | |
8286 word. | |
8287 | |
8288 `(not word-boundary)' | |
8289 matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a | |
8290 word. | |
8291 | |
8292 `digit' | |
8293 matches 0 through 9. | |
8294 | |
8295 `control' | |
8296 matches ASCII control characters. | |
8297 | |
8298 `hex-digit' | |
8299 matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
8300 | |
8301 `blank' | |
8302 matches space and tab only. | |
8303 | |
8304 `graphic' | |
8305 matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
8306 space, and DEL. | |
8307 | |
8308 `printing' | |
8309 matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
8310 and DEL. | |
8311 | |
8312 `alphanumeric' | |
8313 matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
8314 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
8315 | |
8316 `letter' | |
8317 matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
8318 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
8319 | |
8320 `ascii' | |
8321 matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
8322 | |
8323 `nonascii' | |
8324 matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
8325 | |
8326 `lower' | |
8327 matches anything lower-case. | |
8328 | |
8329 `upper' | |
8330 matches anything upper-case. | |
8331 | |
8332 `punctuation' | |
8333 matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
8334 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
8335 | |
8336 `space' | |
8337 matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
8338 | |
8339 `word' | |
8340 matches anything that has word syntax. | |
8341 | |
8342 `(syntax SYNTAX)' | |
8343 matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one | |
8344 of the following symbols. | |
8345 | |
8346 `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation) | |
8347 `punctuation' (\\s.) | |
8348 `word' (\\sw) | |
8349 `symbol' (\\s_) | |
8350 `open-parenthesis' (\\s() | |
8351 `close-parenthesis' (\\s)) | |
8352 `expression-prefix' (\\s') | |
8353 `string-quote' (\\s\") | |
8354 `paired-delimiter' (\\s$) | |
8355 `escape' (\\s\\) | |
8356 `character-quote' (\\s/) | |
8357 `comment-start' (\\s<) | |
8358 `comment-end' (\\s>) | |
8359 | |
8360 `(not (syntax SYNTAX))' | |
8361 matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX. | |
8362 | |
8363 `(category CATEGORY)' | |
8364 matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be | |
8365 either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols. | |
8366 | |
8367 `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation) | |
8368 `base-vowel' (\\c1) | |
8369 `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2) | |
8370 `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3) | |
8371 `tone-mark' (\\c4) | |
8372 `symbol' (\\c5) | |
8373 `digit' (\\c6) | |
8374 `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7) | |
8375 `vowel-sign' (\\c8) | |
8376 `semivowel-lower' (\\c9) | |
8377 `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<) | |
8378 `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>) | |
8379 `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA) | |
8380 `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC) | |
8381 `greek-two-byte' (\\cG) | |
8382 `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH) | |
8383 `indian-two-byte' (\\cI) | |
8384 `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK) | |
8385 `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN) | |
8386 `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY) | |
8387 `ascii' (\\ca) | |
8388 `arabic' (\\cb) | |
8389 `chinese' (\\cc) | |
8390 `ethiopic' (\\ce) | |
8391 `greek' (\\cg) | |
8392 `korean' (\\ch) | |
8393 `indian' (\\ci) | |
8394 `japanese' (\\cj) | |
8395 `japanese-katakana' (\\ck) | |
8396 `latin' (\\cl) | |
8397 `lao' (\\co) | |
8398 `tibetan' (\\cq) | |
8399 `japanese-roman' (\\cr) | |
8400 `thai' (\\ct) | |
8401 `vietnamese' (\\cv) | |
8402 `hebrew' (\\cw) | |
8403 `cyrillic' (\\cy) | |
8404 `can-break' (\\c|) | |
8405 | |
8406 `(not (category CATEGORY))' | |
8407 matches a character that has not category CATEGORY. | |
8408 | |
8409 `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
8410 matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc. | |
8411 | |
8412 `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
8413 like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end', | |
8414 `match-beginning', and `match-string'. | |
8415 | |
8416 `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
8417 another name for `submatch'. | |
8418 | |
8419 `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' | |
8420 matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all | |
8421 args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting | |
8422 regular expression. | |
8423 | |
8424 `(minimal-match SEXP)' | |
8425 produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching | |
8426 zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they | |
8427 match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can | |
8428 still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible. | |
8429 | |
8430 `(maximal-match SEXP)' | |
8431 produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default. | |
8432 | |
8433 `(zero-or-more SEXP)' | |
8434 matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
8435 | |
8436 `(0+ SEXP)' | |
8437 like `zero-or-more'. | |
8438 | |
8439 `(* SEXP)' | |
8440 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
8441 | |
8442 `(*? SEXP)' | |
8443 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
8444 | |
8445 `(one-or-more SEXP)' | |
8446 matches one or more occurrences of A. | |
8447 | |
8448 `(1+ SEXP)' | |
8449 like `one-or-more'. | |
8450 | |
8451 `(+ SEXP)' | |
8452 like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
8453 | |
8454 `(+? SEXP)' | |
8455 like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
8456 | |
8457 `(zero-or-one SEXP)' | |
8458 matches zero or one occurrences of A. | |
8459 | |
8460 `(optional SEXP)' | |
8461 like `zero-or-one'. | |
8462 | |
8463 `(? SEXP)' | |
8464 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp. | |
8465 | |
8466 `(?? SEXP)' | |
8467 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. | |
8468 | |
8469 `(repeat N SEXP)' | |
8470 matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
8471 | |
8472 `(repeat N M SEXP)' | |
8473 matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches. | |
8474 | |
8475 `(eval FORM)' | |
8476 evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string, | |
8477 `regexp-quote' it. | |
8478 | |
8479 `(regexp REGEXP)' | |
8480 include REGEXP in string notation in the result. | |
8481 | |
8482 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. | |
8483 | |
8484 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the | |
8485 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside | |
8486 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved | |
8487 restriction to be restored incorrectly. | |
8488 | |
8489 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include | |
8490 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list | |
8491 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a | |
8492 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. | |
8493 | |
8494 *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and | |
8495 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string | |
8496 if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. | |
8497 | |
8498 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is | |
8499 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern | |
8500 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character | |
8501 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if | |
8502 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the | |
8503 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra | |
8504 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset | |
8505 eight-bit-graphic. | |
8506 | |
8507 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. | |
8508 | |
8509 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for | |
8510 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a | |
8511 character set as previously. | |
8512 | |
8513 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. | |
8514 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function | |
8515 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. | |
8516 | |
8517 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic | |
8518 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the | |
8519 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that | |
8520 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. | |
8521 | |
8522 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family | |
8523 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. | |
8524 | |
8525 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset | |
8526 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset | |
8527 "fontset-default". | |
8528 | |
8529 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second | |
8530 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. | |
8531 | |
8532 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character | |
8533 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in | |
8534 buffers and strings. | |
8535 | |
8536 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite | |
8537 character' which is an independent character with a unique character | |
8538 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' | |
8539 have been deleted: composite-char-component, | |
8540 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, | |
8541 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. | |
8542 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have | |
8543 also been deleted. | |
8544 | |
8545 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to | |
8546 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable | |
8547 `reference-point-alist' for more detail. | |
8548 | |
8549 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and | |
8550 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a | |
8551 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters | |
8552 may differ between buffer and string text. | |
8553 | |
8554 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, | |
8555 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. | |
8556 | |
8557 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' | |
8558 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. | |
8559 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property | |
8560 `composition' from STRING. | |
8561 | |
8562 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about | |
8563 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. | |
8564 | |
8565 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as | |
8566 obsolete. | |
8567 | |
8568 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on | |
8569 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. | |
8570 | |
8571 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', | |
8572 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been | |
8573 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, | |
8574 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. | |
8575 | |
8576 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so | |
8577 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew, | |
8578 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are | |
8579 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text | |
8580 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be | |
8581 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system. | |
8582 | |
8583 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. | |
8584 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For | |
8585 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system. | |
8586 | |
8587 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and | |
8588 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese | |
8589 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. | |
8590 | |
8591 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' | |
8592 have been introduced. | |
8593 | |
8594 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' | |
8595 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and | |
8596 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of | |
8597 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the | |
8598 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the | |
8599 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for | |
8600 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string | |
8601 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to | |
8602 their multibyte equivalent. | |
8603 | |
8604 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to | |
8605 that offset in the file before writing. | |
8606 | |
8607 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and | |
8608 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). | |
8609 | |
8610 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the | |
8611 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
8612 from which the command was issued. | |
8613 | |
8614 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
8615 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
8616 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
8617 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
8618 operate on. | |
8619 | |
8620 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative | |
8621 to `window-buffer-height'. | |
8622 | |
8623 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
8624 | |
8625 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
8626 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
8627 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
8628 | |
8629 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
8630 respectively. | |
8631 | |
8632 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument | |
8633 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. | |
8634 | |
8635 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
8636 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
8637 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
8638 | |
8639 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
8640 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
8641 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
8642 is currently displayed in some window. | |
8643 | |
8644 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the | |
8645 argument function's results. | |
8646 | |
8647 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now | |
8648 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also, | |
8649 `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs | |
8650 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte | |
8651 sequence). | |
8652 | |
8653 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' | |
8654 header in the list of headers passed to it. | |
8655 | |
8656 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
8657 ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
8658 | |
8659 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
8660 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted | |
8661 as follows: | |
8662 | |
8663 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
8664 nil don't display a cursor | |
8665 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
8666 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
8667 others display a box cursor. | |
8668 | |
8669 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether | |
8670 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
8671 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
8672 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
8673 | |
8674 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax | |
8675 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to | |
8676 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' | |
8677 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
8678 | |
8679 Example: | |
8680 | |
8681 (string-to-syntax "()") | |
8682 => (4 . 41) | |
8683 | |
8684 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases | |
8685 other than 10. | |
8686 | |
8687 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
8688 INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
8689 | |
8690 #b1111 | |
8691 => 15 | |
8692 #b-1111 | |
8693 => -15 | |
8694 | |
8695 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
8696 | |
8697 #o666 | |
8698 => 438 | |
8699 | |
8700 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
8701 | |
8702 #xbeef | |
8703 => 48815 | |
8704 | |
8705 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
8706 | |
8707 #2R-111 | |
8708 => -7 | |
8709 #25rah | |
8710 => 267 | |
8711 | |
8712 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of | |
8713 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC | |
8714 and isn't a string. | |
8715 | |
8716 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for | |
8717 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
8718 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
8719 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
8720 | |
8721 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. | |
8722 | |
8723 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches | |
8724 for a regexp in a string. | |
8725 | |
8726 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook | |
8727 `mouse-position-function'. | |
8728 | |
8729 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers | |
8730 that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
8731 | |
8732 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. | |
8733 Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
8734 | |
8735 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
8736 returns it. | |
8737 | |
8738 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector | |
8739 returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
8740 | |
8741 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' | |
8742 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. | |
8743 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a | |
8744 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the | |
8745 mode. | |
8746 | |
8747 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument | |
8748 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. | |
8749 | |
8750 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol | |
8751 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook | |
8752 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it | |
8753 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has | |
8754 been performed." | |
8755 | |
8756 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, | |
8757 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the | |
8758 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, | |
8759 then the self-inserting character is not inserted. | |
8760 | |
8761 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. | |
8762 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
8763 and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
8764 | |
8765 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms | |
8766 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
8767 specified table. | |
8768 | |
8769 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
8770 | |
8771 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
8772 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the | |
8773 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is | |
8774 what BODY returns. | |
8775 | |
8776 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as | |
8777 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. | |
8778 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the | |
8779 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). | |
8780 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). | |
8781 | |
8782 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been | |
8783 removed since it wasn't used by anything. | |
8784 | |
8785 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required | |
8786 instead of being optional. | |
8787 | |
8788 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to | |
8789 modify read-only text. | |
8790 | |
8791 ** New functions and variables for locales. | |
8792 | |
8793 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and | |
8794 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and | |
8795 time functions like strftime. The new variables | |
8796 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system | |
8797 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. | |
8798 | |
8799 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language | |
8800 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from | |
8801 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG | |
8802 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need | |
8803 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables | |
8804 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and | |
8805 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. | |
8806 | |
8807 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. | |
8808 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' | |
8809 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment | |
8810 start sequences. | |
8811 | |
8812 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' | |
8813 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. | |
8814 | |
8815 ** New function `propertize' | |
8816 | |
8817 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
8818 strings with text properties. | |
8819 | |
8820 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
8821 | |
8822 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
8823 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
8824 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
8825 specified value of that property. Example: | |
8826 | |
8827 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
8828 | |
8829 ** push and pop macros. | |
8830 | |
8831 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp | |
8832 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols | |
8833 as the place that holds the list to be changed. | |
8834 | |
8835 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
8836 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
8837 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
8838 | |
8839 ** New dolist and dotimes macros. | |
8840 | |
8841 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp | |
8842 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. | |
8843 | |
8844 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
8845 Execute body once for each element of LIST, | |
8846 using the variable VAR to hold the current element. | |
8847 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
8848 | |
8849 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) | |
8850 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, | |
8851 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. | |
8852 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. | |
8853 | |
8854 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as | |
8855 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character | |
8856 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period | |
8857 or a sign. | |
8858 | |
8859 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
8860 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
8861 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
8862 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
8863 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
8864 space, and DEL. | |
8865 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
8866 and DEL. | |
8867 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
8868 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
8869 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
8870 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
8871 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
8872 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
8873 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
8874 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
8875 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
8876 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
8877 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
8878 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
8879 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
8880 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
8881 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
8882 | |
8883 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
8884 | |
8885 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
8886 | |
8887 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
8888 | |
8889 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
8890 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
8891 | |
8892 :test TEST | |
8893 | |
8894 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
8895 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
8896 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
8897 | |
8898 :size SIZE | |
8899 | |
8900 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
8901 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
8902 | |
8903 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
8904 | |
8905 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
8906 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
8907 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
8908 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
8909 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
8910 | |
8911 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
8912 | |
8913 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
8914 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
8915 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
8916 | |
8917 :weakness WEAK | |
8918 | |
8919 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', | |
8920 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as | |
8921 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage | |
8922 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere | |
8923 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
8924 | |
8925 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
8926 | |
8927 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
8928 | |
8929 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
8930 | |
8931 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
8932 | |
8933 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
8934 | |
8935 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
8936 values are shared. | |
8937 | |
8938 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
8939 | |
8940 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
8941 | |
8942 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
8943 | |
8944 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
8945 | |
8946 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
8947 | |
8948 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
8949 | |
8950 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
8951 | |
8952 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
8953 | |
8954 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE | |
8955 | |
8956 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
8957 | |
8958 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
8959 | |
8960 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
8961 | |
8962 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
8963 | |
8964 Clear TABLE. | |
8965 | |
8966 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
8967 | |
8968 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
8969 not found. | |
8970 | |
8971 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE | |
8972 | |
8973 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
8974 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
8975 | |
8976 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
8977 | |
8978 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
8979 | |
8980 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
8981 | |
8982 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
8983 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
8984 | |
8985 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
8986 | |
8987 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
8988 | |
8989 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
8990 | |
8991 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
8992 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
8993 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test | |
8994 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' | |
8995 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
8996 | |
8997 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
8998 | |
8999 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
9000 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
9001 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
9002 | |
9003 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
9004 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
9005 | |
9006 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
9007 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
9008 | |
9009 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
9010 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
9011 | |
9012 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= | |
9013 'case-fold-string-hash)) | |
9014 | |
9015 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
9016 | |
9017 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
9018 | |
9019 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
9020 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
9021 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
9022 | |
9023 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
9024 | |
9025 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
9026 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
9027 | |
9028 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
9029 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
9030 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
9031 is too short to reach that column. | |
9032 | |
9033 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
9034 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
9035 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
9036 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
9037 | |
9038 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
9039 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
9040 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
9041 | |
9042 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
9043 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
9044 | |
9045 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
9046 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
9047 | |
9048 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
9049 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
9050 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
9051 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
9052 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
9053 | |
9054 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
9055 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
9056 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
9057 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
9058 | |
9059 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
9060 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. | |
9061 | |
9062 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
9063 | |
9064 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
9065 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
9066 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
9067 | |
9068 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
9069 | |
9070 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
9071 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
9072 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
9073 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
9074 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
9075 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
9076 | |
9077 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
9078 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
9079 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
9080 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
9081 | |
9082 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
9083 | |
9084 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
9085 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
9086 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
9087 result string. | |
9088 | |
9089 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
9090 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
9091 | |
9092 Example: | |
9093 | |
9094 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
9095 (s2 "world")) | |
9096 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
9097 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
9098 (format s1 s2)) | |
9099 | |
9100 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
9101 | |
9102 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
9103 | |
9104 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
9105 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
9106 argument in it. | |
9107 | |
9108 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
9109 (arg "world")) | |
9110 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
9111 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
9112 (message msg arg)) | |
9113 | |
9114 ** Sound support | |
9115 | |
9116 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
9117 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
9118 | |
9119 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
9120 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
9121 to enable sound support. | |
9122 | |
9123 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
9124 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
9125 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
9126 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
9127 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
9128 | |
9129 The following sound properties are supported: | |
9130 | |
9131 - `:file FILE' | |
9132 | |
9133 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
9134 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
9135 | |
9136 - `:data DATA' | |
9137 | |
9138 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
9139 may be present, but not both. | |
9140 | |
9141 - `:volume VOLUME' | |
9142 | |
9143 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
9144 0..1. This property is optional. | |
9145 | |
9146 - `:device DEVICE' | |
9147 | |
9148 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the | |
9149 sound. The default device is system-dependent. | |
9150 | |
9151 Other properties are ignored. | |
9152 | |
9153 An alternative interface is called as | |
9154 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). | |
9155 | |
9156 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. | |
9157 | |
9158 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being | |
9159 a keyword symbol. | |
9160 | |
9161 ** Changes to garbage collection | |
9162 | |
9163 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number | |
9164 of live and free strings. | |
9165 | |
9166 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of | |
9167 strings that have been consed so far. | |
9168 | |
9169 | |
9170 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs | |
9171 Lisp Manual | |
9172 | |
9173 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes | |
9174 mini-windows. | |
9175 | |
9176 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional | |
9177 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is | |
9178 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. | |
9179 | |
9180 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. | |
9181 | |
9182 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. | |
9183 | |
9184 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an | |
9185 image. | |
9186 | |
9187 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME | |
9188 | |
9189 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). | |
9190 | |
9191 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes | |
9192 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical | |
9193 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default | |
9194 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. | |
9195 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
9196 | |
9197 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image | |
9198 has a mask bitmap. | |
9199 | |
9200 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME | |
9201 | |
9202 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. | |
9203 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil | |
9204 or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
9205 | |
9206 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image | |
9207 satisfying one of a list of specifications. | |
9208 | |
9209 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now | |
9210 optional. | |
9211 | |
9212 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see | |
9213 below). | |
9214 | |
9215 | |
9216 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 | |
9217 | |
9218 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used | |
9219 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
9220 | |
9221 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
9222 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
9223 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
9224 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
9225 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
9226 just display it black instead. | |
9227 | |
9228 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
9229 a line like | |
9230 | |
9231 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
9232 | |
9233 in your `.emacs'. | |
9234 | |
9235 ** New face implementation. | |
9236 | |
9237 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
9238 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
9239 | |
9240 *** New faces. | |
9241 | |
9242 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
9243 | |
9244 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
9245 | |
9246 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set | |
9247 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
9248 | |
9249 3. Font height in 1/10pt | |
9250 | |
9251 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. | |
9252 | |
9253 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. | |
9254 | |
9255 6. Foreground color. | |
9256 | |
9257 7. Background color. | |
9258 | |
9259 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
9260 | |
9261 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
9262 | |
9263 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
9264 | |
9265 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
9266 | |
9267 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
9268 color. | |
9269 | |
9270 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
9271 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
9272 | |
9273 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
9274 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
9275 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
9276 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
9277 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face | |
9278 attributes mentioned above. | |
9279 | |
9280 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
9281 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
9282 created frames. | |
9283 | |
9284 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified | |
9285 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
9286 `fully-specified'. | |
9287 | |
9288 *** Face merging. | |
9289 | |
9290 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
9291 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
9292 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
9293 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
9294 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
9295 results in a fully-specified face. | |
9296 | |
9297 *** Face realization. | |
9298 | |
9299 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
9300 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
9301 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
9302 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
9303 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
9304 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
9305 | |
9306 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
9307 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
9308 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
9309 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
9310 | |
9311 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
9312 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
9313 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
9314 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
9315 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
9316 | |
9317 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
9318 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
9319 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
9320 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
9321 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
9322 Emacs. | |
9323 | |
9324 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
9325 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
9326 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
9327 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
9328 | |
9329 **** Clearing face caches. | |
9330 | |
9331 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
9332 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
9333 unused fonts. | |
9334 | |
9335 *** Font selection. | |
9336 | |
9337 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a | |
9338 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
9339 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
9340 | |
9341 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
9342 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
9343 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
9344 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
9345 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
9346 | |
9347 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
9348 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
9349 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
9350 | |
9351 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
9352 | |
9353 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
9354 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
9355 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
9356 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
9357 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
9358 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
9359 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
9360 | |
9361 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify | |
9362 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face | |
9363 doesn't exist. | |
9364 | |
9365 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify | |
9366 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a | |
9367 registry. | |
9368 | |
9369 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are | |
9370 slightly different. | |
9371 | |
9372 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. | |
9373 | |
9374 | |
9375 **** Scalable fonts | |
9376 | |
9377 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
9378 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
9379 servers. | |
9380 | |
9381 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
9382 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use | |
9383 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. | |
9384 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
9385 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
9386 that list. Example: | |
9387 | |
9388 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
9389 | |
9390 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
9391 | |
9392 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
9393 | |
9394 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
9395 | |
9396 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
9397 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
9398 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
9399 | |
9400 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
9401 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
9402 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
9403 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
9404 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
9405 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
9406 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
9407 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
9408 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
9409 of the face font sort order. | |
9410 | |
9411 - Function: x-font-family-list | |
9412 | |
9413 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
9414 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
9415 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
9416 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
9417 | |
9418 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
9419 | |
9420 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
9421 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
9422 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
9423 | |
9424 *** Setting face attributes. | |
9425 | |
9426 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
9427 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
9428 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
9429 `face-attribute'. | |
9430 | |
9431 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
9432 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
9433 | |
9434 The following attributes are recognized: | |
9435 | |
9436 `:family' | |
9437 | |
9438 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
9439 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
9440 and `?' are allowed. | |
9441 | |
9442 `:width' | |
9443 | |
9444 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
9445 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
9446 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
9447 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
9448 | |
9449 `:height' | |
9450 | |
9451 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use | |
9452 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to | |
9453 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old | |
9454 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. | |
9455 | |
9456 `:weight' | |
9457 | |
9458 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
9459 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
9460 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
9461 | |
9462 `:slant' | |
9463 | |
9464 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
9465 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
9466 `reverse-oblique'. | |
9467 | |
9468 `:foreground', `:background' | |
9469 | |
9470 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
9471 | |
9472 `:underline' | |
9473 | |
9474 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
9475 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
9476 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
9477 don't underline. | |
9478 | |
9479 `:overline' | |
9480 | |
9481 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
9482 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
9483 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
9484 overline. | |
9485 | |
9486 `:strike-through' | |
9487 | |
9488 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
9489 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
9490 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
9491 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
9492 | |
9493 `:box' | |
9494 | |
9495 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
9496 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
9497 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
9498 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
9499 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
9500 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
9501 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
9502 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
9503 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
9504 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
9505 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
9506 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
9507 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
9508 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
9509 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
9510 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
9511 box. | |
9512 | |
9513 `:inverse-video' | |
9514 | |
9515 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
9516 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
9517 | |
9518 `:stipple' | |
9519 | |
9520 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
9521 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
9522 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
9523 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
9524 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
9525 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
9526 | |
9527 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
9528 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
9529 | |
9530 `:font' | |
9531 | |
9532 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
9533 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
9534 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
9535 versions of Emacs. | |
9536 | |
9537 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
9538 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
9539 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
9540 | |
9541 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
9542 `defface'. | |
9543 | |
9544 `:inherit' | |
9545 | |
9546 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list | |
9547 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face | |
9548 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. | |
9549 | |
9550 *** Face attributes and X resources | |
9551 | |
9552 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
9553 from X resources: | |
9554 | |
9555 Face attribute X resource class | |
9556 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
9557 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
9558 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
9559 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
9560 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
9561 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
9562 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
9563 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
9564 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
9565 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
9566 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
9567 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
9568 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
9569 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
9570 or attributeBackgroundPixmap | |
9571 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap | |
9572 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
9573 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
9574 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
9575 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
9576 | |
9577 *** Text property `face'. | |
9578 | |
9579 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
9580 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
9581 specification can be | |
9582 | |
9583 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
9584 | |
9585 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
9586 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
9587 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
9588 for face attribute names. | |
9589 | |
9590 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
9591 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
9592 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
9593 | |
9594 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
9595 | |
9596 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use | |
9597 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on | |
9598 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by | |
9599 default. You can get defined colors with a call to | |
9600 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be | |
9601 used to clear the mapping table. | |
9602 | |
9603 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. | |
9604 | |
9605 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', | |
9606 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose | |
9607 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style | |
9608 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame | |
9609 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the | |
9610 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and | |
9611 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for | |
9612 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs | |
9613 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to | |
9614 modify their color-related behavior. | |
9615 | |
9616 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for | |
9617 any frame type. | |
9618 | |
9619 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. | |
9620 | |
9621 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', | |
9622 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', | |
9623 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', | |
9624 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', | |
9625 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and | |
9626 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular | |
9627 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing | |
9628 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling | |
9629 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. | |
9630 | |
9631 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular | |
9632 display can display image files. | |
9633 | |
9634 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
9635 | |
9636 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. | |
9637 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize | |
9638 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the | |
9639 `Inviolable' option. | |
9640 | |
9641 The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the | |
9642 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. | |
9643 Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'. | |
9644 | |
9645 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. | |
9646 | |
9647 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs | |
9648 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' | |
9649 property (which can be a text property or an overlay). | |
9650 | |
9651 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, | |
9652 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come | |
9653 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will | |
9654 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement | |
9655 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field | |
9656 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
9657 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
9658 functions. | |
9659 | |
9660 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in | |
9661 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common | |
9662 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. | |
9663 | |
9664 The following functions are defined for operating on fields: | |
9665 | |
9666 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY | |
9667 | |
9668 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. | |
9669 | |
9670 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
9671 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the | |
9672 constrained position if that is different. | |
9673 | |
9674 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable | |
9675 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument | |
9676 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is | |
9677 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property | |
9678 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
9679 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent | |
9680 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with | |
9681 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is | |
9682 also considered to be `on the boundary'. | |
9683 | |
9684 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining | |
9685 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned | |
9686 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like | |
9687 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries | |
9688 only in the case where they can still move to the right line. | |
9689 | |
9690 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has | |
9691 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. | |
9692 | |
9693 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. | |
9694 | |
9695 - Function: delete-field &optional POS | |
9696 | |
9697 Delete the field surrounding POS. | |
9698 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
9699 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. | |
9700 | |
9701 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
9702 | |
9703 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. | |
9704 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
9705 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. | |
9706 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its | |
9707 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. | |
9708 | |
9709 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE | |
9710 | |
9711 Return the end of the field surrounding POS. | |
9712 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
9713 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. | |
9714 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, | |
9715 then the end of the *following* field is returned. | |
9716 | |
9717 - Function: field-string &optional POS | |
9718 | |
9719 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. | |
9720 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
9721 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. | |
9722 | |
9723 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS | |
9724 | |
9725 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. | |
9726 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. | |
9727 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. | |
9728 | |
9729 ** Image support. | |
9730 | |
9731 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
9732 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
9733 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
9734 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
9735 | |
9736 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
9737 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
9738 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
9739 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
9740 area. | |
9741 | |
9742 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
9743 | |
9744 *** Image specifications | |
9745 | |
9746 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
9747 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
9748 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
9749 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not | |
9750 described below are ignored. | |
9751 | |
9752 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
9753 | |
9754 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
9755 | |
9756 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. | |
9757 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
9758 to use for its ascent. | |
9759 | |
9760 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
9761 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
9762 | |
9763 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a | |
9764 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position | |
9765 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and | |
9766 overlays that apply to the image. | |
9767 | |
9768 `:margin MARGIN' | |
9769 | |
9770 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put | |
9771 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the | |
9772 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. | |
9773 | |
9774 `:relief RELIEF' | |
9775 | |
9776 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
9777 around an image. | |
9778 | |
9779 `:conversion ALGO' | |
9780 | |
9781 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. | |
9782 | |
9783 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' | |
9784 edge-detection algorithm to the image. | |
9785 | |
9786 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means | |
9787 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a | |
9788 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at | |
9789 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels | |
9790 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the | |
9791 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the | |
9792 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at | |
9793 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown | |
9794 below. | |
9795 | |
9796 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 | |
9797 x-1/y x/y x+1/y | |
9798 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) | |
9799 | |
9800 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color | |
9801 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, | |
9802 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum | |
9803 of the factors' absolute values. | |
9804 | |
9805 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of | |
9806 | |
9807 (1 0 0 | |
9808 0 0 0 | |
9809 9 9 -1) | |
9810 | |
9811 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of | |
9812 | |
9813 ( 2 -1 0 | |
9814 -1 0 1 | |
9815 0 1 -2) | |
9816 | |
9817 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks | |
9818 ``disabled''. | |
9819 | |
9820 `:mask MASK' | |
9821 | |
9822 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for | |
9823 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the | |
9824 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the | |
9825 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the | |
9826 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is | |
9827 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED | |
9828 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the | |
9829 image. | |
9830 | |
9831 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images | |
9832 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying | |
9833 `:mask nil'. | |
9834 | |
9835 `:file FILE' | |
9836 | |
9837 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
9838 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
9839 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
9840 may be present in the image specification. | |
9841 | |
9842 `:data DATA' | |
9843 | |
9844 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet | |
9845 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be | |
9846 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types | |
9847 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. | |
9848 | |
9849 *** Supported image types | |
9850 | |
9851 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. | |
9852 | |
9853 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
9854 properties supported are: | |
9855 | |
9856 `:foreground FG' | |
9857 | |
9858 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil | |
9859 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color. | |
9860 | |
9861 `:background BG' | |
9862 | |
9863 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil | |
9864 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. | |
9865 | |
9866 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
9867 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
9868 instead of a `:file' property. | |
9869 | |
9870 `:width WIDTH' | |
9871 | |
9872 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
9873 | |
9874 `:height HEIGHT' | |
9875 | |
9876 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
9877 | |
9878 `:data DATA' | |
9879 | |
9880 DATA must be either | |
9881 | |
9882 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
9883 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
9884 | |
9885 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
9886 | |
9887 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
9888 bitmap. | |
9889 | |
9890 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor | |
9891 height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
9892 in the file. | |
9893 | |
9894 **** XPM, image type `xpm' | |
9895 | |
9896 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
9897 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
9898 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
9899 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
9900 | |
9901 Additional image properties supported are: | |
9902 | |
9903 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
9904 | |
9905 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
9906 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
9907 name. | |
9908 | |
9909 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
9910 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
9911 | |
9912 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
9913 to display compressed images. | |
9914 | |
9915 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
9916 | |
9917 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
9918 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for | |
9919 mono images are: | |
9920 | |
9921 `:foreground FG' | |
9922 | |
9923 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil | |
9924 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color. | |
9925 | |
9926 `:background FG' | |
9927 | |
9928 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil | |
9929 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. | |
9930 | |
9931 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
9932 | |
9933 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
9934 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
9935 properties defined. | |
9936 | |
9937 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' | |
9938 | |
9939 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
9940 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
9941 properties defined. | |
9942 | |
9943 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
9944 | |
9945 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
9946 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
9947 | |
9948 Additional image properties supported are: | |
9949 | |
9950 `:index INDEX' | |
9951 | |
9952 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
9953 multi-image GIF file. If INDEX is too large, the image displays | |
9954 as a hollow box. | |
9955 | |
9956 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
9957 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
9958 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
9959 every 0.1 seconds. | |
9960 | |
9961 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
9962 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
9963 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
9964 | |
9965 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
9966 (when (= idx max) | |
9967 (setq idx 0)) | |
9968 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) | |
9969 (save-excursion | |
9970 (set-buffer buffer) | |
9971 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
9972 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
9973 (insert-image img "x")) | |
9974 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
9975 | |
9976 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
9977 | |
9978 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
9979 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
9980 properties defined. | |
9981 | |
9982 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
9983 | |
9984 Additional image properties supported are: | |
9985 | |
9986 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
9987 | |
9988 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
9989 integer. This is a required property. | |
9990 | |
9991 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
9992 | |
9993 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
9994 must be a integer. This is an required property. | |
9995 | |
9996 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
9997 | |
9998 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
9999 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
10000 files. This is an required property. | |
10001 | |
10002 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
10003 lisp/gs.el. | |
10004 | |
10005 *** Lisp interface. | |
10006 | |
10007 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types | |
10008 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
10009 | |
10010 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
10011 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
10012 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
10013 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all | |
10014 images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
10015 | |
10016 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
10017 | |
10018 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
10019 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
10020 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
10021 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
10022 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
10023 buffer. | |
10024 | |
10025 ** Display margins. | |
10026 | |
10027 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
10028 and images. | |
10029 | |
10030 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
10031 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
10032 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
10033 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
10034 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
10035 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
10036 of the display margins. | |
10037 | |
10038 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
10039 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
10040 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
10041 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
10042 in this file). | |
10043 | |
10044 ** Help display | |
10045 | |
10046 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
10047 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
10048 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
10049 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
10050 | |
10051 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function | |
10052 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is | |
10053 the window in which the help was found. | |
10054 | |
10055 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the | |
10056 `help-echo' text property was found. | |
10057 | |
10058 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and | |
10059 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. | |
10060 | |
10061 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with | |
10062 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the | |
10063 mouse. | |
10064 | |
10065 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a | |
10066 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. | |
10067 | |
10068 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to | |
10069 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a | |
10070 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. | |
10071 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is | |
10072 used as help string. | |
10073 | |
10074 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
10075 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window | |
10076 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. | |
10077 | |
10078 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
10079 | |
10080 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
10081 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
10082 | |
10083 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
10084 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
10085 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
10086 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
10087 used. | |
10088 | |
10089 (global-set-key [A-down] | |
10090 #'(lambda () | |
10091 (interactive) | |
10092 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) | |
10093 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) | |
10094 (global-set-key [A-up] | |
10095 #'(lambda () | |
10096 (interactive) | |
10097 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) | |
10098 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) | |
10099 | |
10100 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
10101 | |
10102 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
10103 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
10104 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
10105 is called with one argument, POS. | |
10106 | |
10107 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
10108 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
10109 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
10110 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
10111 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
10112 | |
10113 ** Tool bar support. | |
10114 | |
10115 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
10116 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
10117 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
10118 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
10119 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
10120 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
10121 | |
10122 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
10123 | |
10124 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
10125 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
10126 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
10127 | |
10128 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is | |
10129 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
10130 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
10131 property (see below). | |
10132 | |
10133 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as | |
10134 binding are currently ignored. | |
10135 | |
10136 The following properties are recognized: | |
10137 | |
10138 `:enable FORM'. | |
10139 | |
10140 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled | |
10141 or disabled. | |
10142 | |
10143 `:visible FORM' | |
10144 | |
10145 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. | |
10146 | |
10147 `:filter FUNCTION' | |
10148 | |
10149 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
10150 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
10151 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
10152 | |
10153 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' | |
10154 | |
10155 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
10156 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
10157 | |
10158 `:image IMAGES' | |
10159 | |
10160 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
10161 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
10162 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
10163 | |
10164 Index Use when item is | |
10165 ---------------------------------------- | |
10166 0 enabled and selected | |
10167 1 enabled and deselected | |
10168 2 disabled and selected | |
10169 3 disabled and deselected | |
10170 | |
10171 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection | |
10172 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. | |
10173 | |
10174 `:help HELP-STRING'. | |
10175 | |
10176 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help | |
10177 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
10178 | |
10179 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding | |
10180 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used | |
10181 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the | |
10182 menu bar. | |
10183 | |
10184 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar | |
10185 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set | |
10186 buffer-locally to override the global map. | |
10187 | |
10188 *** Tool-bar-related variables. | |
10189 | |
10190 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
10191 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
10192 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
10193 | |
10194 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be | |
10195 raised when the mouse moves over them. | |
10196 | |
10197 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
10198 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
10199 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and | |
10200 vertical margins . Default is 1. | |
10201 | |
10202 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
10203 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
10204 | |
10205 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
10206 | |
10207 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
10208 a tool bar item. If | |
10209 | |
10210 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
10211 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
10212 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
10213 | |
10214 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
10215 | |
10216 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
10217 | |
10218 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
10219 item. | |
10220 | |
10221 ** Mode line changes. | |
10222 | |
10223 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
10224 | |
10225 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
10226 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
10227 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
10228 | |
10229 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
10230 a `local-map' text property. | |
10231 | |
10232 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
10233 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
10234 | |
10235 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
10236 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
10237 `local-map' property. | |
10238 | |
10239 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
10240 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
10241 example. | |
10242 | |
10243 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is | |
10244 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. | |
10245 | |
10246 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
10247 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
10248 | |
10249 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
10250 | |
10251 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
10252 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
10253 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
10254 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
10255 line. | |
10256 | |
10257 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
10258 `header-line'. | |
10259 | |
10260 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
10261 position in the header-line. | |
10262 | |
10263 ** Text property `display' | |
10264 | |
10265 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, | |
10266 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is | |
10267 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of | |
10268 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
10269 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. | |
10270 | |
10271 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas | |
10272 | |
10273 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other | |
10274 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. | |
10275 | |
10276 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left | |
10277 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in | |
10278 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING | |
10279 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
10280 simpler form STRING as property value. | |
10281 | |
10282 *** Variable width and height spaces | |
10283 | |
10284 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
10285 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
10286 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
10287 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
10288 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
10289 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
10290 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
10291 | |
10292 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
10293 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
10294 properties described below. | |
10295 | |
10296 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
10297 characters having the `display' property. | |
10298 | |
10299 - :width WIDTH | |
10300 | |
10301 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
10302 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
10303 | |
10304 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
10305 | |
10306 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
10307 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
10308 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
10309 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
10310 | |
10311 - :align-to HPOS | |
10312 | |
10313 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
10314 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
10315 | |
10316 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
10317 | |
10318 - :height HEIGHT | |
10319 | |
10320 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
10321 normal line height. | |
10322 | |
10323 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
10324 | |
10325 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
10326 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
10327 | |
10328 - :ascent ASCENT | |
10329 | |
10330 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
10331 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
10332 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
10333 equal to 100. | |
10334 | |
10335 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
10336 | |
10337 *** Images | |
10338 | |
10339 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
10340 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
10341 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
10342 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
10343 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
10344 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
10345 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
10346 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
10347 as display specification. | |
10348 | |
10349 *** Other display properties | |
10350 | |
10351 - (space-width FACTOR) | |
10352 | |
10353 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
10354 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
10355 integer or float. | |
10356 | |
10357 - (height HEIGHT) | |
10358 | |
10359 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
10360 | |
10361 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
10362 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
10363 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
10364 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
10365 a font is available counts as a step. | |
10366 | |
10367 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
10368 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
10369 | |
10370 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
10371 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
10372 | |
10373 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
10374 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
10375 | |
10376 - (raise FACTOR) | |
10377 | |
10378 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
10379 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
10380 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
10381 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
10382 `height' subproperty. | |
10383 | |
10384 *** Conditional display properties | |
10385 | |
10386 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
10387 has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies | |
10388 only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the | |
10389 evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the | |
10390 conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are | |
10391 bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where | |
10392 the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be | |
10393 different when object is a string. | |
10394 | |
10395 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
10396 `(when t . SPEC)'. | |
10397 | |
10398 ** New menu separator types. | |
10399 | |
10400 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
10401 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
10402 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
10403 to specify other menu separator types. | |
10404 | |
10405 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
10406 | |
10407 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
10408 separator occurs. | |
10409 | |
10410 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
10411 | |
10412 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
10413 | |
10414 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
10415 | |
10416 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
10417 | |
10418 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
10419 | |
10420 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
10421 | |
10422 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
10423 | |
10424 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
10425 | |
10426 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
10427 | |
10428 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form | |
10429 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. | |
10430 | |
10431 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
10432 | |
10433 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
10434 | |
10435 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
10436 | |
10437 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
10438 | |
10439 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
10440 | |
10441 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
10442 | |
10443 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
10444 | |
10445 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
10446 | |
10447 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
10448 | |
10449 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
10450 | |
10451 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
10452 | |
10453 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
10454 | |
10455 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
10456 | |
10457 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
10458 | |
10459 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
10460 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
10461 | |
10462 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
10463 | |
10464 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
10465 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
10466 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
10467 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
10468 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
10469 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
10470 default foreground is black. | |
10471 | |
10472 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
10473 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
10474 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
10475 | |
10476 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
10477 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
10478 | |
10479 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
10480 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
10481 | |
10482 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
10483 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
10484 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
10485 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
10486 the original window start. | |
10487 | |
10488 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
10489 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
10490 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
10491 | |
10492 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
10493 | |
10494 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
10495 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
10496 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
10497 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
10498 | |
10499 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
10500 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
10501 | |
10502 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
10503 | |
10504 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
10505 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
10506 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
10507 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
10508 temporarily to nil, for example | |
10509 | |
10510 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
10511 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
10512 | |
10513 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, | |
10514 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. | |
10515 | |
10516 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS | |
10517 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape | |
10518 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter | |
10519 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is | |
10520 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't | |
10521 support a vertical-bar cursor). | |
10522 | |
10523 | |
10524 | |
10525 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes | |
10526 | |
10527 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard | |
10528 input. | |
10529 | |
10530 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. | |
10531 | |
10532 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. | |
10533 | |
10534 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not | |
10535 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The | |
10536 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets | |
10537 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence | |
10538 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. | |
10539 | |
10540 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has | |
10541 been added. | |
10542 | |
10543 | |
10544 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change | |
10545 | |
10546 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. | |
10547 | |
10548 | |
10549 | |
10550 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. | |
10551 | |
10552 ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
10553 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
10554 | |
10555 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
10556 | |
10557 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
10558 | |
10559 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
10560 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
10561 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
10562 | |
10563 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
10564 is the one that is used. | |
10565 | |
10566 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
10567 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
10568 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
10569 separate from the command's regular output. | |
10570 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
10571 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
10572 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
10573 the buffer name. | |
10574 | |
10575 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
10576 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
10577 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
10578 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
10579 | |
10580 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
10581 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
10582 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
10583 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
10584 | |
10585 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
10586 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
10587 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
10588 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
10589 | |
10590 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
10591 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
10592 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
10593 they never ignore case. | |
10594 | |
10595 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
10596 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
10597 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
10598 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
10599 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
10600 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
10601 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
10602 | |
10603 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
10604 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
10605 | |
10606 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
10607 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
10608 | |
10609 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
10610 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
10611 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
10612 | |
10613 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
10614 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
10615 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
10616 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
10617 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
10618 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
10619 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
10620 | |
10621 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
10622 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
10623 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
10624 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
10625 | |
10626 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
10627 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
10628 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
10629 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
10630 | |
10631 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
10632 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
10633 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
10634 | |
10635 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
10636 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
10637 doesn't have any effect. | |
10638 | |
10639 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
10640 not one per buffer. | |
10641 | |
10642 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
10643 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
10644 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
10645 | |
10646 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
10647 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
10648 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
10649 | |
10650 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
10651 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
10652 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
10653 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
10654 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
10655 | |
10656 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
10657 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
10658 | |
10659 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
10660 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
10661 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
10662 | |
10663 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
10664 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
10665 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
10666 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
10667 | |
10668 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
10669 | |
10670 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
10671 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
10672 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
10673 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
10674 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
10675 | |
10676 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
10677 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
10678 | |
10679 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
10680 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
10681 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
10682 `?' on other systems. | |
10683 | |
10684 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
10685 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
10686 Unix. | |
10687 | |
10688 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
10689 current codepage when it starts. | |
10690 | |
10691 ** Mail changes | |
10692 | |
10693 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if | |
10694 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
10695 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
10696 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
10697 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
10698 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
10699 latin-1: | |
10700 | |
10701 MIME-version: 1.0 | |
10702 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
10703 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
10704 | |
10705 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
10706 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
10707 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
10708 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
10709 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
10710 | |
10711 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
10712 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
10713 mail. | |
10714 | |
10715 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
10716 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
10717 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
10718 list of possible coding systems. | |
10719 | |
10720 ** CC Mode changes | |
10721 | |
10722 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
10723 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
10724 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
10725 docstring for details. | |
10726 | |
10727 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
10728 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
10729 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
10730 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
10731 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
10732 | |
10733 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
10734 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
10735 | |
10736 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
10737 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
10738 | |
10739 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
10740 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
10741 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
10742 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
10743 anonymous classes. | |
10744 | |
10745 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
10746 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
10747 | |
10748 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
10749 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
10750 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
10751 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
10752 | |
10753 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
10754 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
10755 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
10756 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
10757 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
10758 | |
10759 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
10760 | |
10761 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
10762 | |
10763 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
10764 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
10765 | |
10766 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
10767 | |
10768 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
10769 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
10770 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
10771 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
10772 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
10773 | |
10774 ** Gnus changes. | |
10775 | |
10776 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
10777 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
10778 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
10779 | |
10780 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
10781 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
10782 group, which is created automatically. | |
10783 | |
10784 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
10785 values. | |
10786 | |
10787 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
10788 | |
10789 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
10790 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
10791 | |
10792 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
10793 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
10794 | |
10795 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
10796 | |
10797 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
10798 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
10799 | |
10800 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
10801 | |
10802 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
10803 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
10804 | |
10805 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
10806 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
10807 | |
10808 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
10809 control over simplification. | |
10810 | |
10811 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
10812 | |
10813 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
10814 limit. | |
10815 | |
10816 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
10817 | |
10818 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
10819 | |
10820 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | |
10821 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | |
10822 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
10823 | |
10824 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix | |
10825 `a' forces normal posting method. | |
10826 | |
10827 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
10828 -- `W d'. | |
10829 | |
10830 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
10831 to a non-nil value. | |
10832 | |
10833 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
10834 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
10835 | |
10836 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
10837 has been added. | |
10838 | |
10839 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
10840 | |
10841 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
10842 | |
10843 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
10844 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
10845 | |
10846 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
10847 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
10848 | |
10849 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
10850 | |
10851 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
10852 been added. | |
10853 | |
10854 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
10855 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
10856 | |
10857 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
10858 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
10859 | |
10860 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
10861 | |
10862 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
10863 | |
10864 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
10865 | |
10866 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
10867 | |
10868 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
10869 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
10870 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
10871 | |
10872 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
10873 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
10874 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
10875 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
10876 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
10877 | |
10878 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
10879 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
10880 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
10881 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
10882 | |
10883 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
10884 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
10885 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
10886 mismatch. | |
10887 | |
10888 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
10889 | |
10890 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
10891 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
10892 | |
10893 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
10894 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
10895 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
10896 removed from the label. | |
10897 | |
10898 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
10899 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
10900 | |
10901 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
10902 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
10903 | |
10904 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
10905 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
10906 expressions. | |
10907 | |
10908 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
10909 | |
10910 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
10911 | |
10912 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
10913 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
10914 | |
10915 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
10916 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
10917 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
10918 | |
10919 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
10920 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
10921 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
10922 | |
10923 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
10924 | |
10925 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
10926 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
10927 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
10928 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
10929 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
10930 | |
10931 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
10932 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
10933 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
10934 | |
10935 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
10936 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
10937 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
10938 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
10939 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
10940 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
10941 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
10942 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
10943 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
10944 | |
10945 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
10946 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
10947 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
10948 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
10949 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
10950 program. | |
10951 | |
10952 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
10953 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
10954 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
10955 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
10956 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
10957 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
10958 | |
10959 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
10960 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
10961 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
10962 was not documented clearly before. | |
10963 | |
10964 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
10965 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
10966 | |
10967 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 | |
10968 | |
10969 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
10970 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
10971 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
10972 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
10973 | |
10974 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
10975 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
10976 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
10977 | |
10978 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
10979 | |
10980 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
10981 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
10982 | |
10983 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
10984 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
10985 integers. | |
10986 | |
10987 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
10988 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
10989 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
10990 file names and attributes are returned. | |
10991 | |
10992 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
10993 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
10994 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. | |
10995 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and | |
10996 returns the result. | |
10997 | |
10998 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
10999 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
11000 | |
11001 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
11002 | |
11003 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
11004 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
11005 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
11006 optionally. | |
11007 | |
11008 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
11009 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
11010 | |
11011 ** | |
11012 The new function process-running-child-p | |
11013 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
11014 terminal to its own child process. | |
11015 | |
11016 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
11017 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
11018 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
11019 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
11020 | |
11021 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
11022 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
11023 | |
11024 ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
11025 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
11026 | |
11027 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
11028 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
11029 to move or copy menu entries. | |
11030 | |
11031 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
11032 | |
11033 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
11034 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
11035 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
11036 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
11037 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
11038 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
11039 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
11040 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
11041 | |
11042 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
11043 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
11044 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
11045 | |
11046 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
11047 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
11048 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
11049 | |
11050 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited | |
11051 | |
11052 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
11053 across the boundary. | |
11054 | |
11055 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
11056 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
11057 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
11058 contains 8-bit characters. | |
11059 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
11060 contains invalid characters. | |
11061 | |
11062 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
11063 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
11064 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
11065 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
11066 way. | |
11067 | |
11068 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
11069 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
11070 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
11071 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
11072 | |
11073 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
11074 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
11075 | |
11076 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
11077 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
11078 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
11079 menus should always use the third argument. | |
11080 | |
11081 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
11082 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
11083 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
11084 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
11085 | |
11086 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
11087 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
11088 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
11089 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
11090 | |
11091 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
11092 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
11093 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
11094 echo area contents. | |
11095 | |
11096 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
11097 | |
11098 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
11099 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
11100 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
11101 | |
11102 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
11103 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
11104 means to clear out that attribute. | |
11105 | |
11106 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
11107 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
11108 | |
11109 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
11110 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
11111 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
11112 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
11113 | |
11114 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
11115 the gap of the current buffer. | |
11116 | |
11117 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
11118 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
11119 current buffer. | |
11120 | |
11121 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
11122 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
11123 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
11124 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
11125 | |
11126 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
11127 | |
11128 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
11129 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
11130 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
11131 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
11132 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
11133 | |
11134 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
11135 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
11136 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
11137 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
11138 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
11139 | |
11140 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
11141 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
11142 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
11143 | |
11144 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
11145 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
11146 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
11147 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
11148 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
11149 results. | |
11150 | |
11151 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
11152 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
11153 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
11154 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
11155 | |
11156 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 | |
11157 | |
11158 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
11159 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
11160 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
11161 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
11162 | |
11163 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
11164 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
11165 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
11166 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
11167 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
11168 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
11169 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
11170 region. | |
11171 | |
11172 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
11173 selective undo. | |
11174 | |
11175 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
11176 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
11177 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
11178 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
11179 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
11180 | |
11181 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
11182 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
11183 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
11184 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
11185 | |
11186 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
11187 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
11188 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
11189 something that most users not do. | |
11190 | |
11191 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
11192 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
11193 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
11194 applications. | |
11195 | |
11196 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
11197 pasting operations. | |
11198 | |
11199 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
11200 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
11201 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
11202 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
11203 `ps-printer-name'. | |
11204 | |
11205 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
11206 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
11207 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
11208 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
11209 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
11210 hits a new word. | |
11211 | |
11212 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
11213 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
11214 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
11215 | |
11216 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
11217 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
11218 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
11219 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
11220 | |
11221 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
11222 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
11223 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
11224 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
11225 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
11226 | |
11227 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
11228 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
11229 | |
11230 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
11231 | |
11232 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
11233 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
11234 respectively. | |
11235 | |
11236 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
11237 | |
11238 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
11239 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
11240 | |
11241 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
11242 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
11243 | |
11244 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
11245 | |
11246 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
11247 | |
11248 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
11249 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
11250 | |
11251 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
11252 given in the following case: | |
11253 o When you are using a complex input method. | |
11254 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
11255 | |
11256 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
11257 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
11258 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
11259 setting it to t is helpful. | |
11260 | |
11261 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
11262 | |
11263 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
11264 keys: | |
11265 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
11266 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
11267 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
11268 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
11269 environment. | |
11270 | |
11271 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
11272 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
11273 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
11274 get | |
11275 | |
11276 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
11277 | |
11278 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
11279 | |
11280 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
11281 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
11282 | |
11283 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
11284 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
11285 its owner and group. | |
11286 | |
11287 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
11288 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
11289 | |
11290 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
11291 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
11292 | |
11293 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
11294 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
11295 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
11296 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
11297 | |
11298 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
11299 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
11300 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
11301 for writing keyboard macros. | |
11302 | |
11303 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
11304 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
11305 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
11306 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
11307 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
11308 info. | |
11309 | |
11310 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
11311 | |
11312 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
11313 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
11314 contents only. | |
11315 | |
11316 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
11317 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
11318 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
11319 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
11320 | |
11321 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
11322 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
11323 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
11324 | |
11325 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
11326 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
11327 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
11328 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
11329 | |
11330 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
11331 failure if the command produces no output. | |
11332 | |
11333 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
11334 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
11335 the mouse. | |
11336 | |
11337 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
11338 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
11339 function and variable names. | |
11340 | |
11341 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
11342 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
11343 file-coding-system-alist. | |
11344 | |
11345 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
11346 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
11347 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
11348 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
11349 according to the current fontset. | |
11350 | |
11351 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
11352 | |
11353 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
11354 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
11355 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
11356 | |
11357 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
11358 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
11359 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
11360 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
11361 | |
11362 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
11363 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
11364 | |
11365 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
11366 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
11367 | |
11368 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
11369 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
11370 command keys. | |
11371 | |
11372 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
11373 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
11374 | |
11375 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
11376 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
11377 all variables that have documentation. | |
11378 | |
11379 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
11380 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
11381 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
11382 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
11383 it should show; the default is 20. | |
11384 | |
11385 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
11386 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
11387 of your input. | |
11388 | |
11389 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
11390 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
11391 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
11392 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
11393 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
11394 Newly added options are included as well. | |
11395 | |
11396 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
11397 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
11398 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
11399 | |
11400 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
11401 Customize menu. | |
11402 | |
11403 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
11404 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
11405 | |
11406 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
11407 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
11408 invoked. | |
11409 | |
11410 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
11411 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
11412 The default is 1. | |
11413 | |
11414 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
11415 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
11416 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
11417 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
11418 sensibly. | |
11419 | |
11420 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
11421 | |
11422 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
11423 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
11424 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
11425 | |
11426 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
11427 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
11428 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
11429 every night. | |
11430 | |
11431 ** Desktop changes | |
11432 | |
11433 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
11434 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
11435 | |
11436 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored | |
11437 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
11438 | |
11439 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
11440 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
11441 | |
11442 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
11443 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
11444 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
11445 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
11446 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
11447 made invisible again. | |
11448 | |
11449 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
11450 | |
11451 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
11452 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
11453 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
11454 toggle. | |
11455 | |
11456 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
11457 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
11458 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
11459 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
11460 rmail-default-body-file. | |
11461 | |
11462 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
11463 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
11464 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
11465 | |
11466 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
11467 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
11468 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
11469 | |
11470 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
11471 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
11472 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
11473 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
11474 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
11475 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
11476 | |
11477 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
11478 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
11479 provided by feedmail are: | |
11480 | |
11481 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
11482 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
11483 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
11484 | |
11485 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
11486 be prompted for confirmation | |
11487 | |
11488 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
11489 | |
11490 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
11491 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
11492 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
11493 | |
11494 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
11495 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
11496 /usr/lib/sendmail, and Emacs Lisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
11497 function for something else (10-20 lines of Lisp code). | |
11498 | |
11499 ** Dired changes | |
11500 | |
11501 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
11502 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
11503 | |
11504 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
11505 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
11506 | |
11507 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
11508 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
11509 for a specified regexp. | |
11510 | |
11511 ** VC Changes | |
11512 | |
11513 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
11514 conveniently. | |
11515 | |
11516 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
11517 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
11518 Dired. | |
11519 | |
11520 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
11521 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
11522 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
11523 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
11524 | |
11525 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
11526 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
11527 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
11528 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
11529 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
11530 | |
11531 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
11532 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
11533 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
11534 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
11535 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
11536 | |
11537 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
11538 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
11539 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | |
11540 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | |
11541 | |
11542 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
11543 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
11544 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
11545 | |
11546 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
11547 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
11548 session to resolve them. | |
11549 | |
11550 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
11551 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
11552 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
11553 uses as well). | |
11554 | |
11555 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
11556 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
11557 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
11558 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
11559 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
11560 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
11561 using ediff. | |
11562 | |
11563 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
11564 | |
11565 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
11566 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
11567 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
11568 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
11569 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
11570 | |
11571 ** Frame name display changes | |
11572 | |
11573 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
11574 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
11575 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
11576 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
11577 | |
11578 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
11579 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
11580 menu. | |
11581 | |
11582 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
11583 | |
11584 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
11585 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
11586 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
11587 | |
11588 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
11589 | |
11590 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
11591 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
11592 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
11593 | |
11594 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
11595 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
11596 the following line. | |
11597 | |
11598 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
11599 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
11600 previously sent input. | |
11601 | |
11602 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
11603 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
11604 as the search string. | |
11605 | |
11606 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
11607 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
11608 | |
11609 ** C mode changes | |
11610 | |
11611 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
11612 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
11613 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
11614 definition. | |
11615 | |
11616 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
11617 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
11618 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
11619 style is still the default however. | |
11620 | |
11621 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
11622 | |
11623 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
11624 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
11625 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
11626 | |
11627 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
11628 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
11629 | |
11630 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
11631 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
11632 | |
11633 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
11634 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
11635 | |
11636 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
11637 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
11638 | |
11639 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
11640 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
11641 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
11642 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
11643 | |
11644 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
11645 | |
11646 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | |
11647 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | |
11648 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
11649 | |
11650 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
11651 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
11652 expanding dynamically. | |
11653 | |
11654 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
11655 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
11656 | |
11657 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
11658 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
11659 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
11660 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
11661 | |
11662 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
11663 | |
11664 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
11665 | |
11666 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
11667 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
11668 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
11669 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
11670 against the first word in the title. | |
11671 | |
11672 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
11673 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
11674 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
11675 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | |
11676 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | |
11677 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | |
11678 | |
11679 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
11680 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
11681 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
11682 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
11683 | |
11684 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
11685 | |
11686 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
11687 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
11688 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
11689 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
11690 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
11691 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
11692 | |
11693 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
11694 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
11695 | |
11696 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
11697 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
11698 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. | |
11699 | |
11700 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
11701 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
11702 | |
11703 ** Ispell changes. | |
11704 | |
11705 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | |
11706 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
11707 are identified by syntax tables in effect. | |
11708 | |
11709 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
11710 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
11711 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
11712 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
11713 include: | |
11714 | |
11715 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
11716 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
11717 | |
11718 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
11719 | |
11720 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
11721 | |
11722 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
11723 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
11724 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
11725 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
11726 | |
11727 *** New recursive parser. | |
11728 | |
11729 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
11730 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
11731 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
11732 | |
11733 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
11734 | |
11735 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | |
11736 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
11737 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
11738 | |
11739 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
11740 | |
11741 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
11742 | |
11743 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
11744 | |
11745 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
11746 | |
11747 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
11748 | |
11749 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
11750 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
11751 | |
11752 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
11753 | |
11754 *** References to external documents. | |
11755 | |
11756 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
11757 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
11758 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
11759 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
11760 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
11761 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
11762 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
11763 | |
11764 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
11765 | |
11766 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, | |
11767 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. | |
11768 | |
11769 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
11770 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
11771 | |
11772 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
11773 | |
11774 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
11775 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
11776 | |
11777 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
11778 | |
11779 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
11780 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
11781 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
11782 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
11783 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
11784 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
11785 more. | |
11786 | |
11787 *** Support for the varioref package | |
11788 | |
11789 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
11790 | |
11791 *** New hooks | |
11792 | |
11793 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
11794 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
11795 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
11796 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
11797 | |
11798 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
11799 | |
11800 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
11801 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
11802 | |
11803 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
11804 | |
11805 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
11806 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
11807 fontified, use | |
11808 | |
11809 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
11810 | |
11811 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
11812 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
11813 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
11814 directories that contain the same file name. | |
11815 | |
11816 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
11817 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
11818 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
11819 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
11820 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
11821 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
11822 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
11823 directory. | |
11824 | |
11825 ** New modes and packages | |
11826 | |
11827 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
11828 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
11829 it, but some do not. | |
11830 | |
11831 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
11832 code. | |
11833 | |
11834 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
11835 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
11836 around in a buffer. | |
11837 | |
11838 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
11839 | |
11840 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
11841 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
11842 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
11843 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
11844 | |
11845 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
11846 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
11847 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
11848 | |
11849 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
11850 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
11851 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc.); others are implementations of | |
11852 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
11853 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
11854 the like. | |
11855 | |
11856 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
11857 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
11858 | |
11859 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
11860 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
11861 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
11862 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
11863 | |
11864 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
11865 | |
11866 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
11867 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
11868 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
11869 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
11870 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc.) | |
11871 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
11872 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
11873 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
11874 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
11875 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
11876 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
11877 | |
11878 Platform-specific modes: | |
11879 | |
11880 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
11881 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
11882 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
11883 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
11884 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
11885 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
11886 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
11887 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
11888 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
11889 | |
11890 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
11891 | |
11892 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
11893 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
11894 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
11895 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
11896 | |
11897 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
11898 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
11899 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
11900 | |
11901 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
11902 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
11903 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
11904 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
11905 | |
11906 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
11907 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
11908 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
11909 environment. | |
11910 | |
11911 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
11912 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
11913 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
11914 current input method for reading this one event. | |
11915 | |
11916 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
11917 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
11918 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
11919 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
11920 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
11921 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
11922 | |
11923 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published | |
11924 | |
11925 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
11926 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
11927 | |
11928 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
11929 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
11930 always increases point by 1. | |
11931 | |
11932 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
11933 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
11934 | |
11935 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
11936 | |
11937 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
11938 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
11939 default value changed. For example, | |
11940 | |
11941 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
11942 :type 'integer | |
11943 :group 'foo | |
11944 :version "20.3") | |
11945 | |
11946 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | |
11947 :version "20.3") | |
11948 | |
11949 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
11950 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
11951 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
11952 `:version' in the top level group. | |
11953 | |
11954 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
11955 | |
11956 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
11957 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
11958 | |
11959 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
11960 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
11961 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
11962 to themselves. | |
11963 | |
11964 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
11965 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
11966 values whatever. | |
11967 | |
11968 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
11969 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
11970 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
11971 | |
11972 ** Frame-local variables. | |
11973 | |
11974 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
11975 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
11976 local bindings for that variable. | |
11977 | |
11978 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
11979 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
11980 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
11981 parameter name. | |
11982 | |
11983 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
11984 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
11985 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
11986 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
11987 | |
11988 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
11989 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
11990 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
11991 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
11992 | |
11993 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
11994 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
11995 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
11996 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
11997 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
11998 | |
11999 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
12000 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
12001 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
12002 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
12003 | |
12004 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
12005 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
12006 | |
12007 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
12008 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
12009 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
12010 | |
12011 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
12012 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
12013 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
12014 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
12015 | |
12016 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
12017 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
12018 empty input. | |
12019 | |
12020 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
12021 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
12022 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
12023 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
12024 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
12025 | |
12026 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
12027 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
12028 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
12029 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
12030 | |
12031 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
12032 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
12033 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
12034 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
12035 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
12036 | |
12037 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
12038 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
12039 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
12040 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
12041 | |
12042 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
12043 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
12044 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
12045 | |
12046 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
12047 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
12048 was directed to display this buffer. | |
12049 | |
12050 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
12051 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
12052 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
12053 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
12054 set-window-configuration. | |
12055 | |
12056 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
12057 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
12058 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
12059 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
12060 | |
12061 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
12062 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
12063 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
12064 | |
12065 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
12066 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
12067 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
12068 | |
12069 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
12070 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
12071 | |
12072 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
12073 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
12074 | |
12075 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
12076 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
12077 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
12078 | |
12079 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
12080 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
12081 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
12082 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
12083 | |
12084 ** Menu changes | |
12085 | |
12086 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
12087 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
12088 better supported. | |
12089 | |
12090 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
12091 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
12092 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
12093 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
12094 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
12095 | |
12096 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
12097 | |
12098 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
12099 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
12100 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
12101 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
12102 | |
12103 The format is: | |
12104 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
12105 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
12106 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
12107 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
12108 The supported properties include | |
12109 | |
12110 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
12111 item is enabled. | |
12112 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
12113 item should appear in the menu. | |
12114 :filter FILTER-FN | |
12115 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | |
12116 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
12117 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
12118 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
12119 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
12120 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with | |
12121 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. | |
12122 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
12123 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
12124 keyboard binding. | |
12125 :key-sequence nil | |
12126 This means that the command normally has no | |
12127 keyboard equivalent. | |
12128 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
12129 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
12130 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
12131 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
12132 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
12133 | |
12134 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
12135 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
12136 | |
12137 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
12138 | |
12139 ** New event types | |
12140 | |
12141 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
12142 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
12143 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
12144 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
12145 | |
12146 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
12147 | |
12148 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
12149 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
12150 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
12151 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
12152 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
12153 forward, away from the user. | |
12154 | |
12155 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
12156 | |
12157 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
12158 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
12159 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
12160 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
12161 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
12162 | |
12163 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
12164 | |
12165 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
12166 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
12167 that were dragged and dropped. | |
12168 | |
12169 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
12170 | |
12171 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
12172 | |
12173 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
12174 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
12175 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
12176 | |
12177 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
12178 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
12179 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
12180 | |
12181 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
12182 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
12183 | |
12184 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
12185 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
12186 | |
12187 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
12188 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
12189 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
12190 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
12191 | |
12192 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
12193 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
12194 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
12195 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
12196 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
12197 | |
12198 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
12199 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
12200 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
12201 consistent with the new representation. | |
12202 | |
12203 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
12204 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
12205 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
12206 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
12207 | |
12208 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
12209 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
12210 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
12211 | |
12212 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
12213 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
12214 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
12215 | |
12216 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
12217 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
12218 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
12219 | |
12220 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
12221 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
12222 | |
12223 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
12224 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
12225 | |
12226 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
12227 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
12228 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
12229 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
12230 | |
12231 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
12232 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
12233 | |
12234 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
12235 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
12236 buffer or string being searched. | |
12237 | |
12238 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
12239 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
12240 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
12241 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
12242 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
12243 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
12244 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
12245 | |
12246 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
12247 | |
12248 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
12249 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
12250 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
12251 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
12252 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
12253 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
12254 define-coding-system-alias. | |
12255 | |
12256 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
12257 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
12258 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
12259 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
12260 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
12261 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
12262 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
12263 `iso-8859-1'. | |
12264 | |
12265 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
12266 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
12267 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
12268 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
12269 | |
12270 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
12271 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
12272 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
12273 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
12274 | |
12275 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
12276 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
12277 This function requires a user interaction. | |
12278 | |
12279 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
12280 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
12281 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
12282 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
12283 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
12284 select-safe-coding-system. | |
12285 | |
12286 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
12287 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
12288 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
12289 was done. | |
12290 | |
12291 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
12292 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
12293 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
12294 | |
12295 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
12296 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
12297 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
12298 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
12299 | |
12300 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
12301 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
12302 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
12303 converted. | |
12304 | |
12305 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
12306 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
12307 | |
12308 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
12309 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
12310 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
12311 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
12312 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
12313 range of characters. | |
12314 | |
12315 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
12316 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
12317 | |
12318 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
12319 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
12320 | |
12321 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
12322 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
12323 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
12324 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
12325 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
12326 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
12327 | |
12328 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
12329 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
12330 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
12331 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
12332 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
12333 | |
12334 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
12335 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
12336 | |
12337 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
12338 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
12339 | |
12340 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
12341 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
12342 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
12343 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
12344 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
12345 | |
12346 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
12347 | |
12348 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
12349 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
12350 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
12351 tree structure. | |
12352 | |
12353 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
12354 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
12355 | |
12356 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
12357 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
12358 in your .emacs file.) | |
12359 | |
12360 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
12361 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
12362 | |
12363 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
12364 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
12365 | |
12366 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
12367 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
12368 kills the region. | |
12369 | |
12370 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
12371 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
12372 | |
12373 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
12374 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
12375 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
12376 | |
12377 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
12378 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
12379 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
12380 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
12381 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
12382 past.) | |
12383 | |
12384 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
12385 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
12386 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
12387 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
12388 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
12389 | |
12390 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
12391 and is an alias for it. | |
12392 | |
12393 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
12394 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
12395 | |
12396 ** Scrolling changes | |
12397 | |
12398 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
12399 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
12400 | |
12401 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
12402 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
12403 where it started. | |
12404 | |
12405 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
12406 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
12407 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
12408 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
12409 | |
12410 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
12411 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
12412 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
12413 recenters the window. | |
12414 | |
12415 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
12416 | |
12417 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
12418 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
12419 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
12420 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
12421 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
12422 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
12423 | |
12424 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
12425 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
12426 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
12427 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
12428 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
12429 | |
12430 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
12431 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
12432 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
12433 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
12434 | |
12435 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
12436 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
12437 | |
12438 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
12439 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
12440 | |
12441 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
12442 | |
12443 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
12444 | |
12445 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
12446 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
12447 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
12448 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
12449 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
12450 | |
12451 *** Input methods | |
12452 | |
12453 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
12454 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
12455 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
12456 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
12457 support several input methods. | |
12458 | |
12459 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
12460 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
12461 work. | |
12462 | |
12463 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
12464 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
12465 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
12466 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
12467 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
12468 letter. | |
12469 | |
12470 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
12471 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
12472 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
12473 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
12474 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
12475 | |
12476 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
12477 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
12478 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
12479 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
12480 | |
12481 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
12482 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
12483 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
12484 the first guess is wrong. | |
12485 | |
12486 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
12487 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
12488 | |
12489 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
12490 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
12491 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
12492 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
12493 | |
12494 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
12495 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
12496 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
12497 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
12498 | |
12499 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
12500 | |
12501 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
12502 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
12503 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
12504 what you want. | |
12505 | |
12506 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
12507 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
12508 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
12509 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
12510 | |
12511 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
12512 character conversion as well. | |
12513 | |
12514 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
12515 | |
12516 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
12517 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
12518 requires using many fonts. | |
12519 | |
12520 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
12521 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
12522 | |
12523 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
12524 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
12525 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
12526 you would use a font. | |
12527 | |
12528 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
12529 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
12530 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
12531 | |
12532 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
12533 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
12534 characters). | |
12535 | |
12536 *** Defining fontsets. | |
12537 | |
12538 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
12539 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
12540 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
12541 | |
12542 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
12543 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
12544 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
12545 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
12546 | |
12547 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
12548 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
12549 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
12550 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
12551 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
12552 | |
12553 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
12554 The resource value should have this form: | |
12555 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
12556 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
12557 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
12558 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
12559 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
12560 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
12561 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
12562 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME | |
12563 should specify an actual font to use for that character set. | |
12564 | |
12565 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
12566 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
12567 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
12568 | |
12569 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
12570 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
12571 following resource, | |
12572 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
12573 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
12574 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
12575 Here is the substitution rule: | |
12576 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
12577 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
12578 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
12579 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
12580 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
12581 | |
12582 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
12583 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
12584 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
12585 | |
12586 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
12587 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
12588 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
12589 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
12590 fontsets. | |
12591 | |
12592 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
12593 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
12594 | |
12595 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
12596 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
12597 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
12598 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
12599 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
12600 system for new files that you create. | |
12601 | |
12602 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
12603 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
12604 whole Emacs session. | |
12605 | |
12606 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
12607 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
12608 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
12609 | |
12610 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
12611 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
12612 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
12613 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
12614 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
12615 | |
12616 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
12617 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
12618 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
12619 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
12620 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
12621 | |
12622 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
12623 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
12624 | |
12625 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
12626 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
12627 | |
12628 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
12629 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
12630 | |
12631 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
12632 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
12633 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
12634 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
12635 of the file. | |
12636 | |
12637 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
12638 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
12639 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
12640 translated into that character code. | |
12641 | |
12642 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
12643 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
12644 | |
12645 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
12646 | |
12647 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
12648 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
12649 | |
12650 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
12651 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
12652 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
12653 | |
12654 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
12655 | |
12656 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
12657 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
12658 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
12659 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
12660 designed to work with terminals. | |
12661 | |
12662 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
12663 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
12664 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
12665 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
12666 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
12667 in the corresponding buffer. | |
12668 | |
12669 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
12670 | |
12671 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
12672 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
12673 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
12674 | |
12675 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
12676 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
12677 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
12678 want to use. | |
12679 | |
12680 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
12681 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
12682 | |
12683 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
12684 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
12685 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
12686 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
12687 | |
12688 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
12689 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
12690 related information. | |
12691 | |
12692 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
12693 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
12694 scripts. | |
12695 | |
12696 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
12697 information about the support for a particular language. | |
12698 You specify the language as an argument. | |
12699 | |
12700 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
12701 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
12702 first dash. | |
12703 | |
12704 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
12705 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
12706 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
12707 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
12708 | |
12709 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
12710 B big5 (Chinese) | |
12711 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
12712 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
12713 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
12714 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
12715 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
12716 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
12717 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
12718 R koi8 (Russian) | |
12719 Q tibetan | |
12720 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
12721 T lao | |
12722 T tis620 (Thai) | |
12723 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
12724 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
12725 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
12726 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
12727 z hz (Chinese) | |
12728 | |
12729 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
12730 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
12731 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
12732 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
12733 | |
12734 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
12735 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
12736 | |
12737 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
12738 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
12739 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
12740 Rmail files themselves. | |
12741 | |
12742 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
12743 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
12744 | |
12745 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
12746 for sending mail: | |
12747 | |
12748 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
12749 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
12750 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
12751 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
12752 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
12753 | |
12754 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
12755 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
12756 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
12757 translations. | |
12758 | |
12759 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
12760 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
12761 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
12762 without any conversion. | |
12763 | |
12764 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
12765 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
12766 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
12767 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
12768 | |
12769 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
12770 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
12771 | |
12772 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
12773 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
12774 | |
12775 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
12776 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
12777 | |
12778 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
12779 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
12780 in the buffer before point. | |
12781 | |
12782 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
12783 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
12784 you are using. | |
12785 | |
12786 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
12787 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
12788 | |
12789 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
12790 | |
12791 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
12792 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
12793 | |
12794 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
12795 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
12796 can become a bottleneck. | |
12797 | |
12798 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
12799 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
12800 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
12801 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
12802 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
12803 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
12804 | |
12805 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
12806 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
12807 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
12808 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
12809 | |
12810 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
12811 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
12812 show-paren-mode. | |
12813 | |
12814 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
12815 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
12816 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
12817 | |
12818 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
12819 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
12820 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
12821 | |
12822 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
12823 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
12824 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
12825 | |
12826 ** Changes in View mode. | |
12827 | |
12828 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
12829 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
12830 | |
12831 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
12832 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
12833 | |
12834 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
12835 previous state. | |
12836 | |
12837 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
12838 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
12839 | |
12840 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
12841 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
12842 not just the selected window. | |
12843 | |
12844 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
12845 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
12846 turns View mode on or off. | |
12847 | |
12848 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
12849 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
12850 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
12851 | |
12852 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
12853 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
12854 | |
12855 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
12856 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
12857 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
12858 which version to compare with. | |
12859 | |
12860 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
12861 blocks if a match is inside the block. | |
12862 | |
12863 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
12864 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
12865 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
12866 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
12867 | |
12868 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
12869 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
12870 blocks, all of them or none. | |
12871 | |
12872 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
12873 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
12874 confirmation first. | |
12875 | |
12876 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
12877 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
12878 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
12879 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
12880 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
12881 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
12882 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
12883 | |
12884 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
12885 | |
12886 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
12887 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
12888 | |
12889 ** M-x occur changes. | |
12890 | |
12891 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
12892 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
12893 | |
12894 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
12895 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
12896 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
12897 | |
12898 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
12899 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
12900 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
12901 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
12902 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
12903 | |
12904 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
12905 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
12906 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
12907 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
12908 | |
12909 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
12910 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
12911 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
12912 | |
12913 ** Outline mode changes. | |
12914 | |
12915 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
12916 | |
12917 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
12918 | |
12919 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
12920 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
12921 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
12922 was already active. | |
12923 | |
12924 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
12925 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
12926 get confused by it. | |
12927 | |
12928 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
12929 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
12930 | |
12931 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
12932 | |
12933 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
12934 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
12935 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
12936 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
12937 | |
12938 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
12939 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
12940 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
12941 | |
12942 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
12943 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
12944 values. | |
12945 | |
12946 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
12947 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
12948 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
12949 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
12950 | |
12951 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
12952 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
12953 can be. The default value is 30. | |
12954 | |
12955 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
12956 | |
12957 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
12958 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
12959 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
12960 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
12961 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
12962 behavior. | |
12963 | |
12964 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
12965 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
12966 | |
12967 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
12968 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
12969 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
12970 buffer that shows the original message. | |
12971 | |
12972 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
12973 with separator lines around the contents. | |
12974 | |
12975 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
12976 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
12977 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
12978 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
12979 | |
12980 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
12981 | |
12982 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
12983 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
12984 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
12985 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
12986 | |
12987 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
12988 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
12989 /etc/passwd. | |
12990 | |
12991 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
12992 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
12993 /etc/passwd. | |
12994 | |
12995 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
12996 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
12997 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
12998 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
12999 | |
13000 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
13001 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
13002 be taken to be magic. | |
13003 | |
13004 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
13005 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
13006 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
13007 | |
13008 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
13009 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
13010 | |
13011 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
13012 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
13013 | |
13014 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
13015 | |
13016 new key dired.el binding old key | |
13017 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
13018 * c dired-change-marks c | |
13019 * m dired-mark m | |
13020 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
13021 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
13022 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
13023 * u dired-unmark u | |
13024 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
13025 * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-? | |
13026 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
13027 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
13028 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
13029 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
13030 | |
13031 ** Rmail changes. | |
13032 | |
13033 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
13034 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
13035 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
13036 each time you run it. | |
13037 | |
13038 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
13039 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
13040 | |
13041 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
13042 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
13043 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
13044 | |
13045 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
13046 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
13047 | |
13048 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
13049 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
13050 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
13051 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
13052 for output. | |
13053 | |
13054 ** Gnus changes. | |
13055 | |
13056 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
13057 | |
13058 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | |
13059 Gnus. | |
13060 | |
13061 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
13062 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | |
13063 | |
13064 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
13065 article mode line. | |
13066 | |
13067 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
13068 | |
13069 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
13070 | |
13071 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
13072 | |
13073 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
13074 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
13075 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
13076 | |
13077 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
13078 | |
13079 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
13080 | |
13081 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
13082 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
13083 | |
13084 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
13085 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
13086 used to pick articles. | |
13087 | |
13088 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
13089 another have been added. | |
13090 | |
13091 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
13092 | |
13093 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
13094 generating lines in buffers. | |
13095 | |
13096 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
13097 `C-M-_'. | |
13098 | |
13099 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
13100 | |
13101 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
13102 | |
13103 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
13104 | |
13105 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
13106 | |
13107 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | |
13108 | |
13109 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
13110 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
13111 | |
13112 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
13113 the native server. | |
13114 | |
13115 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
13116 | |
13117 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
13118 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'. | |
13119 | |
13120 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
13121 | |
13122 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
13123 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
13124 | |
13125 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
13126 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
13127 | |
13128 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
13129 a group. | |
13130 | |
13131 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
13132 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
13133 | |
13134 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
13135 | |
13136 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
13137 | |
13138 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
13139 | |
13140 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
13141 | |
13142 Use the `Y c' command. | |
13143 | |
13144 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
13145 | |
13146 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
13147 | |
13148 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
13149 | |
13150 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
13151 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
13152 | |
13153 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | |
13154 | |
13155 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
13156 | |
13157 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
13158 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
13159 | |
13160 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
13161 | |
13162 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
13163 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
13164 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
13165 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
13166 this issue.) | |
13167 | |
13168 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
13169 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
13170 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
13171 | |
13172 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
13173 | |
13174 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
13175 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
13176 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
13177 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
13178 for reading and posting). | |
13179 | |
13180 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
13181 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
13182 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
13183 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
13184 there. | |
13185 | |
13186 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
13187 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
13188 | |
13189 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
13190 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
13191 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
13192 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
13193 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
13194 | |
13195 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
13196 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
13197 | |
13198 ** CC mode changes. | |
13199 | |
13200 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
13201 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
13202 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
13203 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
13204 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
13205 loaded. | |
13206 | |
13207 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
13208 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | |
13209 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | |
13210 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | |
13211 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
13212 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | |
13213 | |
13214 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
13215 of the current buffer. | |
13216 | |
13217 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
13218 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
13219 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
13220 | |
13221 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
13222 style that the Python developers like. | |
13223 | |
13224 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
13225 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
13226 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
13227 | |
13228 ** VC Changes [new] | |
13229 | |
13230 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
13231 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
13232 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
13233 | |
13234 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
13235 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
13236 developers. | |
13237 | |
13238 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
13239 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
13240 | |
13241 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
13242 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
13243 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
13244 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
13245 | |
13246 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
13247 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
13248 | |
13249 ** Calendar changes. | |
13250 | |
13251 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or | |
13252 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow | |
13253 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the | |
13254 following/previous years. | |
13255 | |
13256 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in | |
13257 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i | |
13258 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days | |
13259 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The | |
13260 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a | |
13261 supposed attribute of God. | |
13262 | |
13263 ** ps-print changes | |
13264 | |
13265 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page | |
13266 layout. | |
13267 | |
13268 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup) | |
13269 | |
13270 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to | |
13271 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your | |
13272 printer system has this behavior, set variable | |
13273 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t. | |
13274 | |
13275 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a | |
13276 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the | |
13277 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014). | |
13278 | |
13279 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for | |
13280 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are: | |
13281 | |
13282 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'. | |
13283 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex | |
13284 printing for your printer. | |
13285 | |
13286 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the | |
13287 setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
13288 | |
13289 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using | |
13290 the setpagedevice PostScript operator. | |
13291 | |
13292 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on | |
13293 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If | |
13294 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for | |
13295 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil, | |
13296 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom. | |
13297 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil. | |
13298 The default value is nil. | |
13299 | |
13300 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame | |
13301 properties alist. Valid frame properties are: | |
13302 | |
13303 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color. | |
13304 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black | |
13305 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a | |
13306 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which | |
13307 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each | |
13308 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright | |
13309 color). The default is 0 ("black"). | |
13310 | |
13311 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color). | |
13312 The default is 0.9 ("gray90"). | |
13313 | |
13314 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color). | |
13315 The default is 0 ("black"). | |
13316 | |
13317 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color). | |
13318 The default is 0 ("black"). | |
13319 | |
13320 border-width Specify the border width. | |
13321 The default is 0.4. | |
13322 | |
13323 Any other property is ignored. | |
13324 | |
13325 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the | |
13326 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for | |
13327 documentation). | |
13328 | |
13329 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are: | |
13330 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame', | |
13331 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad', | |
13332 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and | |
13333 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those | |
13334 controlling headers. | |
13335 | |
13336 *** Color management (subgroup) | |
13337 | |
13338 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in | |
13339 color. | |
13340 | |
13341 *** Face Management (subgroup) | |
13342 | |
13343 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors, | |
13344 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face | |
13345 background should be used. Valid values are: | |
13346 | |
13347 t always use face background color. | |
13348 nil never use face background color. | |
13349 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used. | |
13350 | |
13351 *** N-up printing (subgroup) | |
13352 | |
13353 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per | |
13354 sheet of paper. | |
13355 | |
13356 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt) | |
13357 between the sheet border and the n-up printing. | |
13358 | |
13359 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around | |
13360 each page. | |
13361 | |
13362 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled | |
13363 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for | |
13364 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix: | |
13365 | |
13366 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12 | |
13367 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 | |
13368 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 | |
13369 | |
13370 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9 | |
13371 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 | |
13372 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 | |
13373 | |
13374 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12 | |
13375 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11 | |
13376 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10 | |
13377 | |
13378 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3 | |
13379 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2 | |
13380 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1 | |
13381 | |
13382 Any other value is treated as `left-top'. | |
13383 | |
13384 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup) | |
13385 | |
13386 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or | |
13387 RGB color. | |
13388 | |
13389 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes | |
13390 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+' | |
13391 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed): | |
13392 | |
13393 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow' | |
13394 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
13395 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13396 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13397 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13398 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + | |
13399 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + | |
13400 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + | |
13401 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13402 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13403 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13404 10 + 10 + | |
13405 11 + 11 + | |
13406 -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
13407 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
13408 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 + | |
13409 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 + | |
13410 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 + | |
13411 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13412 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13413 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + | |
13414 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 + | |
13415 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 + | |
13416 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 + | |
13417 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX + | |
13418 22 + 22 + | |
13419 -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- | |
13420 | |
13421 Any other value is treated as `nil'. | |
13422 | |
13423 | |
13424 *** Printer management (subgroup) | |
13425 | |
13426 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by | |
13427 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when | |
13428 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr | |
13429 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set | |
13430 to "-P". | |
13431 | |
13432 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual | |
13433 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's | |
13434 non-nil, manual feeding takes place. | |
13435 | |
13436 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04) | |
13437 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means | |
13438 do so. | |
13439 | |
13440 *** Page settings (subgroup) | |
13441 | |
13442 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an | |
13443 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size | |
13444 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used | |
13445 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if | |
13446 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated | |
13447 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to | |
13448 `setpagedevice'. | |
13449 | |
13450 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for | |
13451 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means | |
13452 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees). | |
13453 | |
13454 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If | |
13455 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be | |
13456 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO) | |
13457 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that | |
13458 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than | |
13459 its TO, are ignored. | |
13460 | |
13461 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd | |
13462 pages. Valid values are: | |
13463 | |
13464 nil print all pages. | |
13465 | |
13466 `even-page' print only even pages. | |
13467 | |
13468 `odd-page' print only odd pages. | |
13469 | |
13470 `even-sheet' print only even sheets. | |
13471 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
13472 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll | |
13473 print only the even sheet of paper. | |
13474 | |
13475 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets. | |
13476 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like | |
13477 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print | |
13478 only the odd sheet of paper. | |
13479 | |
13480 Any other value is treated as nil. | |
13481 | |
13482 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages | |
13483 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by | |
13484 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have: | |
13485 | |
13486 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20)) | |
13487 | |
13488 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and | |
13489 `ps-n-up-printing', we get: | |
13490 | |
13491 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1: | |
13492 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
13493 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 | |
13494 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
13495 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
13496 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 | |
13497 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 | |
13498 | |
13499 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2: | |
13500 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED | |
13501 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20 | |
13502 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20 | |
13503 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15 | |
13504 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16 | |
13505 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20 | |
13506 | |
13507 *** Miscellany (subgroup) | |
13508 | |
13509 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler | |
13510 messages should be sent. | |
13511 | |
13512 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in | |
13513 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable | |
13514 `ps-user-defined-prologue'. | |
13515 | |
13516 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers. | |
13517 | |
13518 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in | |
13519 points for line numbers. | |
13520 | |
13521 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line | |
13522 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation. | |
13523 | |
13524 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which | |
13525 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set | |
13526 to 2, the printing will look like: | |
13527 | |
13528 1 one line | |
13529 one line | |
13530 3 one line | |
13531 one line | |
13532 5 one line | |
13533 one line | |
13534 ... | |
13535 | |
13536 Valid values are: | |
13537 | |
13538 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are | |
13539 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1 | |
13540 is used. | |
13541 | |
13542 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a | |
13543 zebra stripe is to be printed. | |
13544 | |
13545 Any other value is treated as `zebra'. | |
13546 | |
13547 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in | |
13548 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if | |
13549 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to | |
13550 3, the output will look like: | |
13551 | |
13552 one line | |
13553 one line | |
13554 3 one line | |
13555 one line | |
13556 one line | |
13557 6 one line | |
13558 one line | |
13559 one line | |
13560 9 one line | |
13561 one line | |
13562 ... | |
13563 | |
13564 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory | |
13565 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found. | |
13566 | |
13567 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points, | |
13568 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
13569 `ps-font-size'). | |
13570 | |
13571 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing, | |
13572 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to | |
13573 `ps-font-size'). | |
13574 | |
13575 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter. | |
13576 | |
13577 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the | |
13578 start and end of a region to cut out when printing. | |
13579 | |
13580 ** hideshow changes. | |
13581 | |
13582 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
13583 C++, ; for lisp). | |
13584 | |
13585 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
13586 | |
13587 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
13588 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
13589 | |
13590 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at | |
13591 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your | |
13592 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
13593 | |
13594 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
13595 robust and a lot faster. | |
13596 | |
13597 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | |
13598 | |
13599 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
13600 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
13601 documentation for more details. | |
13602 | |
13603 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
13604 | |
13605 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
13606 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
13607 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
13608 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
13609 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
13610 | |
13611 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
13612 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
13613 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
13614 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
13615 | |
13616 ** Font Lock mode | |
13617 | |
13618 *** Custom support | |
13619 | |
13620 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
13621 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify | |
13622 the faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new | |
13623 custom group font-lock-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in your | |
13624 ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
13625 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
13626 | |
13627 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
13628 | |
13629 *** Maximum decoration | |
13630 | |
13631 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
13632 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
13633 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
13634 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
13635 to get the old behavior. | |
13636 | |
13637 *** New support | |
13638 | |
13639 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
13640 | |
13641 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
13642 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
13643 | |
13644 *** Configurable support | |
13645 | |
13646 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
13647 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
13648 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
13649 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
13650 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
13651 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
13652 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
13653 | |
13654 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
13655 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
13656 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
13657 | |
13658 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
13659 | |
13660 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
13661 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
13662 for any mode. | |
13663 | |
13664 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
13665 | |
13666 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
13667 | |
13668 in your ~/.emacs. | |
13669 | |
13670 *** New faces | |
13671 | |
13672 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
13673 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
13674 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
13675 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
13676 | |
13677 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
13678 | |
13679 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
13680 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
13681 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
13682 | |
13683 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
13684 | |
13685 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
13686 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
13687 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
13688 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
13689 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
13690 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
13691 Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode. | |
13692 | |
13693 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
13694 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
13695 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
13696 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
13697 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
13698 the command M-o M-o (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
13699 | |
13700 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
13701 | |
13702 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
13703 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
13704 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
13705 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
13706 | |
13707 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
13708 settings. | |
13709 | |
13710 ** Ada mode changes. | |
13711 | |
13712 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
13713 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
13714 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
13715 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
13716 stubs. | |
13717 | |
13718 *** There are two new commands: | |
13719 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
13720 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
13721 | |
13722 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
13723 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
13724 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | |
13725 | |
13726 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
13727 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
13728 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
13729 | |
13730 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
13731 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
13732 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
13733 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
13734 | |
13735 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
13736 | |
13737 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
13738 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
13739 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
13740 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
13741 have any effect. | |
13742 | |
13743 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
13744 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
13745 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
13746 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
13747 | |
13748 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
13749 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
13750 | |
13751 ** Changes to the emacsclient program | |
13752 | |
13753 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or | |
13754 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
13755 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
13756 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
13757 | |
13758 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
13759 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | |
13760 buffer in Emacs. | |
13761 | |
13762 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to | |
13763 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable | |
13764 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line | |
13765 option takes precedence. | |
13766 | |
13767 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | |
13768 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
13769 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
13770 | |
13771 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
13772 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
13773 the current defun. | |
13774 | |
13775 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
13776 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
13777 | |
13778 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
13779 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
13780 necessary). | |
13781 | |
13782 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
13783 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
13784 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
13785 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
13786 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
13787 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
13788 | |
13789 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
13790 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
13791 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
13792 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
13793 | |
13794 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
13795 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
13796 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
13797 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
13798 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
13799 | |
13800 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
13801 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
13802 | |
13803 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
13804 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
13805 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
13806 | |
13807 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
13808 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
13809 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
13810 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
13811 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
13812 | |
13813 ** RefTeX mode | |
13814 | |
13815 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
13816 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
13817 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
13818 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
13819 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
13820 | |
13821 C-c ( reftex-label | |
13822 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | |
13823 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
13824 | |
13825 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
13826 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
13827 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
13828 | |
13829 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
13830 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
13831 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
13832 | |
13833 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
13834 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
13835 | |
13836 C-c = reftex-toc | |
13837 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
13838 can quickly jump to every section. | |
13839 | |
13840 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | |
13841 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
13842 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
13843 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
13844 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
13845 | |
13846 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
13847 | |
13848 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
13849 | |
13850 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
13851 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
13852 | |
13853 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
13854 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
13855 | |
13856 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
13857 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
13858 | |
13859 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
13860 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
13861 appropriate functions. | |
13862 | |
13863 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
13864 entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h. | |
13865 | |
13866 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
13867 been cleaned. | |
13868 | |
13869 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
13870 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
13871 | |
13872 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
13873 shall be delimited. | |
13874 | |
13875 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
13876 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
13877 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
13878 | |
13879 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
13880 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
13881 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
13882 | |
13883 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
13884 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
13885 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
13886 documentation). | |
13887 | |
13888 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
13889 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
13890 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
13891 | |
13892 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
13893 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
13894 | |
13895 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
13896 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
13897 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
13898 | |
13899 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
13900 | |
13901 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
13902 | |
13903 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
13904 from alien sources. | |
13905 | |
13906 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
13907 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
13908 crossref entries. | |
13909 | |
13910 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
13911 region. | |
13912 | |
13913 *** Added support for imenu. | |
13914 | |
13915 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
13916 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
13917 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
13918 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
13919 | |
13920 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
13921 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
13922 | |
13923 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
13924 | |
13925 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. | |
13926 | |
13927 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | |
13928 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
13929 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
13930 as an argument. | |
13931 | |
13932 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
13933 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
13934 | |
13935 ** browse-url changes | |
13936 | |
13937 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
13938 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
13939 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
13940 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
13941 customization variables. | |
13942 | |
13943 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
13944 | |
13945 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
13946 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
13947 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
13948 | |
13949 ** Changes in Ediff | |
13950 | |
13951 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
13952 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
13953 | |
13954 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
13955 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
13956 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
13957 directories). | |
13958 | |
13959 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
13960 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
13961 files in the same directory. | |
13962 | |
13963 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
13964 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
13965 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
13966 | |
13967 ** Changes in Viper | |
13968 | |
13969 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
13970 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | |
13971 instead of vip-. | |
13972 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
13973 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | |
13974 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | |
13975 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
13976 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
13977 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
13978 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
13979 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
13980 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
13981 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
13982 | |
13983 ** Etags changes. | |
13984 | |
13985 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
13986 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
13987 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
13988 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
13989 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
13990 | |
13991 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
13992 | |
13993 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
13994 constructs are tagged. Files are recognized by the extension .java. | |
13995 | |
13996 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
13997 recognized by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
13998 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
13999 | |
14000 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
14001 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
14002 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
14003 methods and protocols. | |
14004 | |
14005 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognized by the extension | |
14006 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
14007 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
14008 paragraph name. | |
14009 | |
14010 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
14011 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
14012 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
14013 | |
14014 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
14015 in files has changed slightly. | |
14016 | |
14017 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
14018 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
14019 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
14020 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
14021 | |
14022 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
14023 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
14024 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
14025 reasons. | |
14026 | |
14027 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
14028 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
14029 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
14030 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
14031 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
14032 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
14033 | |
14034 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
14035 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
14036 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
14037 | |
14038 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
14039 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
14040 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
14041 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
14042 | |
14043 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
14044 details. | |
14045 | |
14046 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
14047 | |
14048 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
14049 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
14050 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
14051 | |
14052 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
14053 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
14054 into Emacs. | |
14055 | |
14056 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
14057 | |
14058 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
14059 | |
14060 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
14061 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
14062 | |
14063 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
14064 | |
14065 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
14066 in shell buffers. | |
14067 | |
14068 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
14069 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
14070 and `elint-defun'. | |
14071 | |
14072 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
14073 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
14074 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
14075 strings or comments. | |
14076 | |
14077 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
14078 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
14079 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
14080 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
14081 at these points. | |
14082 | |
14083 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
14084 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
14085 | |
14086 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
14087 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
14088 | |
14089 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
14090 | |
14091 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
14092 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
14093 | |
14094 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
14095 | |
14096 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
14097 | |
14098 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
14099 | |
14100 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
14101 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
14102 | |
14103 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
14104 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
14105 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
14106 original place after inserting the copy. | |
14107 | |
14108 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
14109 on the buffer. | |
14110 | |
14111 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
14112 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
14113 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
14114 | |
14115 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
14116 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
14117 -or- | |
14118 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
14119 | |
14120 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
14121 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
14122 | |
14123 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
14124 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
14125 | |
14126 *** ogonek | |
14127 | |
14128 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
14129 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
14130 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
14131 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
14132 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
14133 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
14134 instance) and vice versa. | |
14135 | |
14136 To use this package load it using | |
14137 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
14138 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
14139 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | |
14140 M-x ogonek-how -- in English | |
14141 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
14142 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
14143 | |
14144 *** Interface to ph. | |
14145 | |
14146 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
14147 | |
14148 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
14149 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
14150 these servers. | |
14151 | |
14152 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
14153 | |
14154 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
14155 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
14156 while the real cursor does not move. | |
14157 | |
14158 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
14159 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
14160 | |
14161 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
14162 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
14163 | |
14164 ** movemail change | |
14165 | |
14166 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
14167 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
14168 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
14169 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
14170 | |
14171 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
14172 | |
14173 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
14174 | |
14175 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
14176 | |
14177 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
14178 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
14179 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
14180 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
14181 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
14182 | |
14183 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
14184 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
14185 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
14186 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
14187 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
14188 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
14189 | |
14190 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 | |
14191 | |
14192 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
14193 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
14194 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
14195 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
14196 | |
14197 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
14198 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
14199 | |
14200 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
14201 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
14202 "win". | |
14203 | |
14204 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
14205 | |
14206 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
14207 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
14208 | |
14209 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
14210 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
14211 or by the user. | |
14212 | |
14213 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
14214 | |
14215 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
14216 | |
14217 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
14218 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
14219 | |
14220 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
14221 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
14222 its argument. | |
14223 | |
14224 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
14225 | |
14226 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
14227 | |
14228 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
14229 | |
14230 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
14231 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
14232 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
14233 `format' function. | |
14234 | |
14235 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
14236 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
14237 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
14238 | |
14239 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
14240 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
14241 adding one of these suffixes. | |
14242 | |
14243 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
14244 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
14245 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | |
14246 | |
14247 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
14248 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
14249 | |
14250 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
14251 | |
14252 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
14253 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
14254 | |
14255 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
14256 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
14257 | |
14258 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
14259 | |
14260 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
14261 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
14262 | |
14263 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
14264 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
14265 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
14266 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
14267 | |
14268 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
14269 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
14270 of the last form. | |
14271 | |
14272 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
14273 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
14274 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
14275 as the last form. | |
14276 | |
14277 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
14278 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
14279 matches. | |
14280 | |
14281 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
14282 | |
14283 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
14284 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
14285 Then it returns that string. | |
14286 | |
14287 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
14288 | |
14289 (with-output-to-string | |
14290 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
14291 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
14292 | |
14293 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
14294 | |
14295 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
14296 is non-nil. | |
14297 | |
14298 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
14299 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
14300 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
14301 | |
14302 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
14303 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
14304 | |
14305 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
14306 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
14307 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
14308 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
14309 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
14310 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
14311 | |
14312 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
14313 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
14314 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
14315 characters". | |
14316 | |
14317 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
14318 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
14319 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
14320 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
14321 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
14322 | |
14323 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
14324 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
14325 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
14326 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
14327 | |
14328 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
14329 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
14330 | |
14331 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
14332 | |
14333 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | |
14334 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
14335 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
14336 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
14337 guaranteed. | |
14338 | |
14339 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
14340 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
14341 character). | |
14342 | |
14343 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
14344 | |
14345 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
14346 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
14347 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
14348 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
14349 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
14350 | |
14351 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
14352 | |
14353 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
14354 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
14355 more than the number of characters. | |
14356 | |
14357 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
14358 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
14359 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
14360 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
14361 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
14362 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
14363 | |
14364 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
14365 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
14366 | |
14367 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
14368 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
14369 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
14370 character, sref signals an error. | |
14371 | |
14372 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
14373 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
14374 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
14375 | |
14376 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
14377 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
14378 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
14379 | |
14380 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
14381 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
14382 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
14383 | |
14384 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
14385 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
14386 | |
14387 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
14388 | |
14389 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
14390 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
14391 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
14392 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
14393 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
14394 | |
14395 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
14396 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
14397 | |
14398 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
14399 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
14400 | |
14401 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
14402 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
14403 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
14404 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
14405 | |
14406 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
14407 | |
14408 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
14409 | |
14410 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
14411 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
14412 are not included in the resulting value. | |
14413 | |
14414 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
14415 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
14416 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
14417 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
14418 | |
14419 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
14420 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
14421 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
14422 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
14423 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
14424 column START-COLUMN. | |
14425 | |
14426 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
14427 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
14428 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
14429 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
14430 changed text, before the change. | |
14431 | |
14432 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
14433 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
14434 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
14435 | |
14436 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
14437 | |
14438 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
14439 | |
14440 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
14441 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
14442 | |
14443 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
14444 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
14445 which identify the character within that character set. | |
14446 | |
14447 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
14448 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
14449 opposite of split-char. | |
14450 | |
14451 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
14452 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
14453 | |
14454 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
14455 of all the characters in a string. | |
14456 | |
14457 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
14458 and specifying coding systems. | |
14459 | |
14460 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
14461 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
14462 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
14463 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
14464 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
14465 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
14466 | |
14467 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
14468 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
14469 | |
14470 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
14471 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
14472 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
14473 | |
14474 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
14475 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
14476 to match against a file name. | |
14477 | |
14478 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
14479 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
14480 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
14481 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
14482 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
14483 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
14484 | |
14485 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
14486 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
14487 | |
14488 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
14489 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
14490 | |
14491 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
14492 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
14493 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
14494 service names. | |
14495 | |
14496 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
14497 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
14498 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
14499 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
14500 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
14501 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
14502 | |
14503 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
14504 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
14505 | |
14506 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
14507 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
14508 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
14509 start the subprocess. | |
14510 | |
14511 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
14512 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
14513 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
14514 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
14515 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
14516 | |
14517 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
14518 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
14519 subprocess. | |
14520 | |
14521 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
14522 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
14523 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
14524 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
14525 | |
14526 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
14527 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
14528 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
14529 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
14530 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
14531 system for one operation at a time. | |
14532 | |
14533 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
14534 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
14535 | |
14536 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
14537 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
14538 The value is a cons cell, | |
14539 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
14540 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
14541 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
14542 input to the subprocess. | |
14543 | |
14544 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
14545 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
14546 | |
14547 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
14548 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
14549 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
14550 | |
14551 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
14552 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
14553 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
14554 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
14555 customization. | |
14556 | |
14557 Thus, instead of writing | |
14558 | |
14559 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
14560 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
14561 | |
14562 you would now write this: | |
14563 | |
14564 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
14565 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
14566 :type 'boolean | |
14567 :group foo) | |
14568 | |
14569 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
14570 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
14571 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
14572 for a description of them. | |
14573 | |
14574 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
14575 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
14576 | |
14577 (defgroup ispell nil | |
14578 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
14579 :group 'processes) | |
14580 | |
14581 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
14582 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
14583 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
14584 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
14585 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
14586 | |
14587 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
14588 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
14589 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
14590 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
14591 first-level subgroups. | |
14592 | |
14593 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
14594 | |
14595 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
14596 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
14597 | |
14598 ** easy-mmode | |
14599 | |
14600 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
14601 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
14602 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
14603 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
14604 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
14605 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
14606 | |
14607 ** Text property changes | |
14608 | |
14609 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
14610 text property. | |
14611 | |
14612 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
14613 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
14614 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
14615 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
14616 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
14617 | |
14618 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
14619 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
14620 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
14621 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
14622 | |
14623 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
14624 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
14625 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
14626 | |
14627 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
14628 | |
14629 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
14630 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
14631 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
14632 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
14633 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
14634 make the overlay visible. | |
14635 | |
14636 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
14637 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
14638 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
14639 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
14640 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
14641 t when it should hide it. | |
14642 | |
14643 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
14644 | |
14645 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
14646 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | |
14647 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
14648 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | |
14649 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
14650 Here is an example of how to do this: | |
14651 | |
14652 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
14653 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
14654 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | |
14655 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
14656 | |
14657 ... | |
14658 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
14659 | |
14660 ... | |
14661 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
14662 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
14663 ;; Or respectively: | |
14664 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
14665 | |
14666 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
14667 | |
14668 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
14669 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
14670 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
14671 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
14672 | |
14673 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
14674 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
14675 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
14676 | |
14677 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
14678 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
14679 | |
14680 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
14681 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
14682 | |
14683 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
14684 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
14685 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
14686 | |
14687 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
14688 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
14689 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
14690 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
14691 | |
14692 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
14693 of the current buffer. | |
14694 | |
14695 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
14696 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
14697 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
14698 | |
14699 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
14700 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
14701 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
14702 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
14703 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
14704 | |
14705 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
14706 text property. | |
14707 | |
14708 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
14709 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
14710 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
14711 | |
14712 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
14713 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
14714 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
14715 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
14716 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
14717 | |
14718 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
14719 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
14720 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
14721 | |
14722 ** Changes in face features | |
14723 | |
14724 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
14725 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
14726 | |
14727 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
14728 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
14729 | |
14730 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
14731 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
14732 | |
14733 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
14734 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
14735 | |
14736 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
14737 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
14738 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
14739 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
14740 overlay property). | |
14741 | |
14742 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
14743 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
14744 | |
14745 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
14746 | |
14747 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
14748 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
14749 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
14750 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
14751 | |
14752 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
14753 begins with ~. | |
14754 | |
14755 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
14756 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
14757 | |
14758 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
14759 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
14760 | |
14761 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
14762 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
14763 | |
14764 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
14765 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
14766 | |
14767 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
14768 (formerly it did not). | |
14769 | |
14770 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
14771 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
14772 | |
14773 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
14774 instead of constant strings. | |
14775 | |
14776 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
14777 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
14778 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
14779 | |
14780 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
14781 in the same way as before. | |
14782 | |
14783 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
14784 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
14785 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
14786 | |
14787 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
14788 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
14789 else, and returns nil. | |
14790 | |
14791 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
14792 directory cannot be listed. | |
14793 | |
14794 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
14795 | |
14796 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
14797 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
14798 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
14799 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
14800 ways: | |
14801 | |
14802 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
14803 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
14804 | |
14805 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
14806 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
14807 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
14808 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
14809 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
14810 | |
14811 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
14812 argument in this way. | |
14813 | |
14814 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
14815 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
14816 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
14817 | |
14818 ** Echo area features | |
14819 | |
14820 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
14821 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
14822 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
14823 after the echo area is cleared. | |
14824 | |
14825 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
14826 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
14827 | |
14828 ** Keyboard input features | |
14829 | |
14830 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
14831 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
14832 | |
14833 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
14834 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
14835 by keyboard macros. | |
14836 | |
14837 ** Frame-related changes | |
14838 | |
14839 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
14840 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
14841 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
14842 | |
14843 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
14844 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
14845 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
14846 | |
14847 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
14848 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
14849 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
14850 in the selected frame. | |
14851 | |
14852 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
14853 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
14854 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
14855 | |
14856 ** X Windows features | |
14857 | |
14858 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
14859 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
14860 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
14861 | |
14862 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
14863 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
14864 | |
14865 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
14866 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
14867 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
14868 | |
14869 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
14870 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
14871 | |
14872 ** Subprocess features | |
14873 | |
14874 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
14875 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
14876 automatically. | |
14877 | |
14878 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
14879 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
14880 | |
14881 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
14882 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
14883 | |
14884 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
14885 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
14886 | |
14887 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
14888 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
14889 goes after the other menu items. | |
14890 | |
14891 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
14892 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | |
14893 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | |
14894 are in use. | |
14895 | |
14896 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
14897 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
14898 | |
14899 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
14900 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
14901 form. | |
14902 | |
14903 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
14904 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
14905 but its hook is still run. | |
14906 | |
14907 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
14908 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
14909 | |
14910 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
14911 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
14912 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
14913 | |
14914 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
14915 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
14916 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
14917 warned. | |
14918 | |
14919 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
14920 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
14921 | |
14922 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
14923 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
14924 functions like display-time. | |
14925 | |
14926 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
14927 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
14928 | |
14929 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
14930 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
14931 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
14932 | |
14933 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
14934 if there is an error in compilation. | |
14935 | |
14936 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
14937 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
14938 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
14939 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
14940 | |
14941 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
14942 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
14943 the *scratch* buffer. | |
14944 | |
14945 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
14946 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
14947 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
14948 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
14949 | |
14950 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
14951 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
14952 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
14953 | |
14954 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
14955 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
14956 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
14957 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
14958 | |
14959 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
14960 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
14961 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
14962 | |
14963 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
14964 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
14965 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
14966 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
14967 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
14968 files at all. | |
14969 | |
14970 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
14971 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
14972 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
14973 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
14974 | |
14975 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
14976 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
14977 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
14978 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
14979 | |
14980 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
14981 | |
14982 ** imenu.el changes. | |
14983 | |
14984 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
14985 item from menu created by imenu. | |
14986 | |
14987 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
14988 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
14989 select one of those items. | |
14990 | |
14991 * For older news, see the file ONEWS | |
14992 | |
14993 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | 5668 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
14994 Copyright information: | 5669 Copyright information: |
14995 | 5670 |
14996 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, | 5671 Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 |
14997 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 5672 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
14998 | 5673 |
14999 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | 5674 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies |
15000 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | 5675 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the |
15001 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | 5676 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, |
15002 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | 5677 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. |